Accton Technology Switch VS4512 User Manual

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: Yes

Traffic classes: Enabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

Setting the Switch’s IP Address

An IP address may be used for management access to the switch over your

network. By default, the switch uses DHCP to assign IP settings to VLAN 1 on the

switch. If you wish to manually configure IP settings, you need to change the

switch’s user-specified defaults (IP address 0.0.0.0 and netmask 255.0.0.0) to

values that are compatible with your network. You may also need to establish a

default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another

network segment.

You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an

address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. Valid IP addresses

consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside

this format will not be accepted by the CLI program.

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Command Attributes

• Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4093, no leading zeroes).

By default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. However, the

management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long

as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address.

• IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual

configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or Boot

Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply

has been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by

the switch for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address,

subnet mask, and default gateway.)

• IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management

access. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by

periods. (Default: 0.0.0.0)

• Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to

specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)

• Gateway IP Address – IP address of the gateway router between this device

and management stations that exist on other network segments.

(Default: 0.0.0.0)

• MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.

Manual Configuration

Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which the

management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,” enter the IP

address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.

3-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Configuration

CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#exit

4-167

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.253

Console(config)#

Using DHCP/BOOTP

If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the switch to be

dynamically configured by these services.

Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the management

station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP. Click Apply to

save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new

address. Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration

settings on each power reset.

Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console connection and enter

“show ip interface” to determine the new switch address.

CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to DHCP or

BOOTP, and then enter the ip dhcp restart command.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp

Console(config-if)#end

4-167

Console#ip dhcp restart

4-83

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: DHCP.

Console#

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a

specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another

network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you

can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.

Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be

able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP

service via the web interface if the current address is still available.

CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#

4-83

Fan Status

The status of the switch fans can be displayed.

Web – Click System, Fan Status.

Managing Firmware

You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server. By saving runtime

code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to

restore operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without

overwriting the previous version. The drop down menu in the web interface allows

you to specify the method of file transfer.

Command Attributes

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Name – The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter

of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file

names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the

switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)

• Destination/Startup File Name – Allows specification of filenames already in

memory, or the creation of a new filename. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”,

“-”, “_”)

• Source File Name – Allows you to specify the name of the chosen source file.

3-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Configuration

Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored

in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this

file cannot be deleted.

Downloading System Software from a Server

When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to

replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the

current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.

Web – Click System, Firmware. Enter the source and destination file names with

any other relevant details such as the IP address of the TFTP server if used, and

click Transfer from Server.

If you download to a new destination file, then select the file from the drop-down box

for the operation code used at startup, and click Apply Changes. To start the new

firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

To remove an operating code file, select the file from the drop-down list and click

Remove File.

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, select “config” or “opcode” file type,

then enter the source and destination file names, set the new file to start up the

system, and then restart the switch.

Console#copy tftp file

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2

Source file name: M100000.bix

Destination file name: V1.0

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system opcode:V1.0

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

4-59

4-20

Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings

You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server. The

configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.

Command Attributes

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Name – The configuration file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the

leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum

length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for

files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)

Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by

available flash memory space.

Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server

You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the

startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination

file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be

copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.

Web – Click System, Configuration. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, enter

the name of the file to download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a

new file name, and then click Transfer from Server.

3-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Configuration

Setting the Startup Configuration File

If you download to a new file name, select the new file from the drop-down list for

Startup Configuration File, and press Apply Changes. To use the new settings,

reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server,

set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19

Source configuration file name: config-1

Startup configuration file name [] : startup

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#reload

Copying the Running Configuration to a File

You can copy the running configuration to a file.

If you download the startup configuration file under a new file name, you can set this

file as the startup file at a later time, and then restart the switch.

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19

Source configuration file name: startup2.0

Startup configuration file name [startup] : startup2.0

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

4-59

4-20

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Resetting the System

Web – Click System, Reset. Click the Reset button to restart the switch.

CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch.

Console#reload

4-20

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>?

Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.

Setting the System Clock

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock

based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an

accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and

times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock using the CLI.

(See “calendar set” on page 48.) If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the

time from the factory default set at the last bootup.

This switch acts as an SNTP client in two modes:

Unicast – The switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured

time server. You can configure up to three time server IP addresses. The switch will

attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.

Broadcast – The switch sets its clock from a time server in the same subnet that

broadcasts time updates. If there is more than one SNTP server, the switch accepts

the first broadcast it detects and ignores broadcasts from other servers.

Configuring SNTP

You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time

servers (i.e., client mode), update its clock using information broadcast from time

servers, or use both methods. When both methods are enabled, the switch will

update its clock using information broadcast from time servers, but will query the

specified server(s) if a broadcast is not received within the polling interval.

Command Attributes

• SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client. This

mode requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field.

• SNTP Broadcast Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP

broadcast client.

3-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Configuration

• SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time

update from a time server when set to SNTP Client mode.

(Range: 16-16284 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)

• SNTP Server – In unicast mode, sets the IP address for up to three time

servers. The switch attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails

it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence.

Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and click

Apply.

CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and as an

SNTP broadcast client.

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#sntp poll 16

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2

Console(config)#sntp broadcast client

Console(config)#

Setting the Time Zone

SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time,

or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To

display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of

hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.

Command Attributes

• Current Time – Displays the current time.

• Name – Assigns a name to the time zone.

• Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.

• Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.

• Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west) UTC.

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to

the UTC, and click Apply.

CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.

Console(config)#clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC

Console#

4-48

Simple Network Management Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol

designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly

managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is

typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network

environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential

problems.

The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status

of its hardware, as well as the traffic passing through its ports. A network

management station can access this information using software such as HP

OpenView. Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings.

To communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid

community string for authentication. The options for configuring community strings,

trap functions, and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are

described in the following sections.

3-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Network Management Protocol

Setting Community Access Strings

You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access.

All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table. For

security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.

Command Attributes

• SNMP Community Capability – Indicates that the switch supports up to five

community strings.

• Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits

access to the SNMP protocol.

Default strings: “public” (read-only access), “private” (read/write access)

Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive

• Access Mode

- Read-Only – Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations

are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

- Read/Write – Specifies read-write access. Authorized management stations

are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select

the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.

CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.

Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw

Console(config)#

4-76

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types

Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers.

You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to

your management station (using network management platforms such as

HP OpenView. You can specify up to five management stations that will receive

authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.

Command Attributes

• Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.

• Trap Manager IP Address – Internet address of the host (the targeted

recipient).

• Trap Manager Community String – Community string sent with the notification

operation. (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)

• Trap Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c

traps. (The default is version 1.)

• Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message whenever an invalid

community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process.

(The default is enabled.)

• Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues link-up or link-down traps.

(The default is enabled.)

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Fill in the IP address and community string for

each trap manager that will receive these messages, specify the SNMP version,

mark the trap types required, and then click Add.

CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and

link-up, link-down traps.

Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.19 private version 2c

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps

4-78

4-79

3-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Network Management Protocol

Filtering Addresses for SNMP Client Access

The switch allows you to create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups

that are allowed access to the switch via SNMP management software.

Command Usage

• To specify the clients allowed SNMP access, enter an IP address along with a

subnet mask to identify a specific host or a range of valid addresses. For

example:

- IP address 192.168.1.1 and mask 255.255.255.255 –

Specifies a valid IP address of 192.168.1.1 for a single client.

- IP address 192.168.1.1 and mask 255.255.255.0 –

Specifies a valid IP address group from 192.168.1.0 to 192.168.1.254.

• IP filtering only restricts management access for clients running SNMP

management software such as HP OpenView. It does not affect management

access to the switch using the web interface or Telnet.

• The default setting is null, which allows all IP groups SNMP access to the

switch. If one or more IP addresses are configured, IP filtering is enabled and

only addresses listed in this table will have SNMP access.

Command Attributes

• IP Filter List – Displays a list of the IP address/subnet mask entries currently

configured for SNMP access.

• IP address – Specifies a new IP address to add to the IP Filter List.

• Subnet Mask – Specifies a single IP address or group of addresses. If the IP is

the address of a single management station, set the mask to 255.255.255.255.

Otherwise, an IP address group will be specified by any other mask.

Web – Click SNMP, IP Filtering. To add a client, enter the new address, the subnet

mask for a node or an address range, and then click “Add IP Filtering Entry.”

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.

Console(config)#snmp ip filter 10.1.2.3 255.255.255.255

Console(config)#

4-80

User Authentication.

Use the Passwords or RADIUS/TACACS+ menu to restrict management access

based on specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access

rights on the switch (Passwords menu), or you can use a remote access

authentication server based on the RADIUS/TACACS+ protocol. You can also use

IEEE 802.1x port authentication to control access to specific ports (dot1X menu).

Configuring the Logon Password

The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters. However, the

administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You

should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and

store it in a safe place.

The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default

administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.” Note that user names can

only be assigned via the CLI.

Command Attributes

• User Name* – The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 5)

• Access Level* – Specifies the user level.

(Options: Normal and Privileged)

• Password – Specifies the user password.

(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)

* CLI only.

Web – Click Security, Passwords. Enter the old password, enter the new password,

confirm it by entering it again, then click Apply.

3-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the

password.

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

4-24

Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication

Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on

specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on

the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS

or TACACS+ protocols.

Remote Authentication Dial-in

User Service (RADIUS) and

Terminal Access Controller Access

Control System Plus (TACACS+)

are logon authentication protocols

that use software running on a

central server to control access to

RADIUS-aware or TACACS

-aware devices on the network. An

authentication server contains a

database of multiple user name/

password pairs with associated

Web

Telnet

console

1. Client attempts management access.

2. Switch contacts authentication server.

3. Authentication server challenges client.

4. Client responds with proper password or key.

5. Authentication server approves access.

6. Switch grants management access.

RADIUS/

TACACS+

server

privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch.

RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,

while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts

only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while

TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

Command Usage

• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication

database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used,

you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding

parameters for the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon

authentication control management access via the console port, web browser,

or Telnet.

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for

each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level

must be configured on the authentication server.

• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the

authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1) RADIUS, (2) TACACS

and (3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified

first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted

using the TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is

checked.

3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Command Attributes

• Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence

required:

- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.

- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.

- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.

- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three

authentication methods in the indicated sequence.

• RADIUS Settings

- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default: 10.1.0.1)

- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for

authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)

- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for

client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to

authenticate logon access via the authentication server.

(Range: 1-30; Default: 2)

- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply

from the RADIUS server before it resends the request.

(Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)

• TACACS Settings

- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default: 10.11.12.13)

- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for

authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)

- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for

client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names

and passwords using the CLI. (See “username” on page 24.)

3-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote

authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence (i.e., one to three

methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS+ authentication if selected,

and click Apply.

CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console#show radius-server

Server IP address: 192.168.1.25

Communication key with radius server:

Server port number: 181

Retransmit times: 5

Request timeout: 10

Console(config)#authentication login tacacs

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console#show tacacs-server

Server IP address: 10.20.30.40

Communication key with tacacs server: green

Server port number: 200

Console(config)#

3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Telnet Settings

Telnet access to the switch can be enabled via the Web or CLI.

Web – Click Security, Telnet Settings, then check the checkbox to enable access via

Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).

CLI – This example enables Telnet access to the switch.

Console#config

4-30

Console(config)#ip telnet server

Console(config-line)#

Configuring HTTPS

You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol

(HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an

encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.

Command Usage

• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the

switch. However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your

browser: https://device[:port_number]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the

connection.

- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting

data.

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above

and Netscape Navigator 4.x or above.

• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:

Web Browser

Operating System

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),

Windows 2000, Windows XP

Netscape Navigator 4.76 or later

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),

Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6

• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site

Certificate” on page 3-29.

3-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

Command Attributes

• HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the

switch.

(Default: Enabled)

•

Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/

SSL connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port 443)

Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number,

then click Apply.

CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 441

Console(config)#

4-29

4-30

Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate

When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure

Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that

Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the

site is not recognized as a secure site. This is because the certificate has not been

signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced

by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must

obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized

certification authority.

Caution: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets

Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default

certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.

When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the

following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default

(unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>

Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>

Source private file name: <private key file name>

Private password: <password for private key>

Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the

switch, type: Console#reload

3-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Configuring the Secure Shell

The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix

systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows

and other environments. These tools, including commands such as, rsh (remote

shell), and rexec (remote execute), are not secure from hostile attacks.

The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure

replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH provides remote

management access via encrypted paths between the switch and SSH-enabled

management station clients. The commands described in this section include

commands used to configure the SSH server. However, you also need to install a

SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the

switch. When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch

generates a public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and

password for access authentication.

Note: The switch supports only SSH Version 1.5.

Command Attributes

• SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server feature on

the switch. (Default: Enabled)

• SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the

SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.

• (Range: 1 to 120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)

• SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts

that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the

authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)

Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication

parameters as required, then click Apply.

3-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays

the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via

SHH, and then disabled this connection.

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5

Console(config)#

4-31

Console#show ip ssh

Information of secure shell

SSH status: enable

SSH authentication timeout: 100

SSH authentication retries: 5

Console#show ssh

Information of secure shell

Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state

------- -------- ------- -------------- -----------------

4-34

4-16

admin

1.5

cipher-3des

session-started

Console#disconnect ssh 0

Console#

Configuring Port Security

Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more

device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.

When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new MAC

addresses on the specified port. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already

stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to

access the network through that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address

attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can

automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message.

To use port security, first allow the switch to dynamically learn the <source MAC

address, VLAN> pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period, and

then enable port security to stop address learning. Be sure you enable the learning

function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been registered

on the selected port. Note that you can also restrict the maximum number of

addresses that can be learned by a port.

To add new VLAN members at a later time, you can manually add secure addresses

with the Static Address Table (page 3-73), or turn off port security to reenable the

learning function long enough for new VLAN members to be registered. Learning

may then be disabled again, if desired, for security.

Command Usage

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

- It cannot use port monitoring.

- It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.

- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.

- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.

• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually

re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 3-42).

3-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Command Attributes

• Port – Port number.

• Action* – The action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:

- None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)

- Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.

- Shutdown: Disable the port.

- Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.

• Status – Enables or disables port security on the port. (Default: Disabled)

• Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be

learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 20)

* These actions can only be taken through CLI commands.

Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is

detected on a port, select Enabled from the drop-down list in the Status column to

enable security for a port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a

port, and click Apply.

CLI – This example sets the command mode to Port 5, sets the port security action

to send a trap and disable the port, and then enables port security for the switch.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown

Console(config-if)#port security

4-67

Console(config-if)#

3-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

Configuring 802.1x Port Authentication

Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by

simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a

desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and

possibly gain access to sensitive network data.

The IEEE 802.1x (dot1x) standard defines a port-based access control procedure

that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit

credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be

centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the

same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

This switch uses the

Extensible Authentication

Protocol over LANs

(EAPOL) to exchange

authentication protocol

802.1x

client

messages with the client,

and a remote RADIUS

authentication server to

1. Client attempts to access a switch port.

2. Switch sends client an identity request.

3. Client sends back identity information.

RADIUS

verify user identity and

access rights. When a

client (i.e., Supplicant)

connects to a switch port,

4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.

5. Authentication server challenges client.

6. Client responds with proper credentials.

7. Authentication server approves access.

8. Switch grants client access to this port.

server

the switch (i.e., Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client

provides its identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch,

which it forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client

identity and sends an access challenge back to the client. The EAP packet from the

RADIUS server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be

used. The client can reject the authentication method and request another,

depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The

authentication method can be MD5, TLS (Transport Layer Security), TTLS

(Tunneled Transport Layer Security), or other. The client responds to the appropriate

method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate. The RADIUS server

verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet. If

authentication is successful, the switch allows the client to access the network.

Otherwise, network access is denied and the port remains blocked.

The operation of 802.1x on the switch requires the following:

• The switch must have an IP address assigned.

• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the

RADIUS server specified.

• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x “Auto” mode.

• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software

installed and properly configured.

• The RADIUS server and 802.1x client support EAP. (The switch only supports

EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)

• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP

authentication type – MD5, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, etc. (Some clients have native

support in Windows, otherwise the dot1x client must support it.)

3-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Displaying 802.1x Global Settings

The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication

process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as

the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication

server. These parameters are described in this section.

Command Attributes

• 802.1x Re-authentication – Indicates if switch port requires a client to be

re-authenticated after a certain period of time.

• 802.1x Max Request Count – The maximum number of times the switch port

will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the

authentication session.

• Timeout for Quiet Period – Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the

Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new

client.

• Timeout for Re-authentication Period – Indicates the time period after which

a connected client must be re-authenticated.

• Timeout for TX Period – The time period during an authentication session that

the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet.

• Supplicant timeout – The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP

request.

• Server timeout – The time the switch waits for a response from the

authentication server (RADIUS) to an authentication request.

• Re-authentication Max Count – The number of times the switch will attempt to

re-authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized.

Web – Click Security, 802.1x, Information.

3-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

CLI – This example shows the default protocol settings for 802.1x. For a description

of the additional entries displayed in the CLI, See “show dot1x” on page 73.

Console#show dot1x

4-73

Global 802.1X Parameters

reauth-enabled: yes

reauth-period: 300

quiet-period:

tx-period:

supp-timeout:

350

300

server-timeout: 30

reauth-max:

max-req:

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name

1/1

Status

disabled

Operation Mode

Single-Host

Mode

ForceAuthorized

Authorized

n/a

1/2

n/a

1/11

1/12

disabled

enabled

Single-Host

ForceAuthorized

Auto

yes

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1

802.1X is enabled on port 12

Status

Unauthorized

Operation mode

Max count

Single-Host

Port-control

Supplicant

Auto

00-00-00-00-00-00

Current Identifier 0

Authenticator State Machine

State

Connecting

Reauth Count

Backend State Machine

State

Idle

Request Count

Identifier(Server) 0

Reauthentication State Machine

State

Initialize

Console#

3-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Configuring 802.1x Global Settings

The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication

process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as

the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication

server. The configuration options for parameters are described in this section.

Command Attributes

• 802.1x Re-authentication – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the

interval specified by the Timeout for Re-authentication Period.

Re-authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch

port. (Default: Disabled)

• 802.1x Max Request Count – Sets the maximum number of times the switch

port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the

authentication session. (Range: 1-10; Default 2)

• Timeout for Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the

dot1X Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a

new client. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)

• Timeout for Re-authentication Period – Sets the time period after which a

connected client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;

Default: 3600 seconds)

• Timeout for TX Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session

that the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535;

Default: 30 seconds)

• authentication dot1x default* – Sets the default authentication server type.

Note that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly

configured for dot1x to function properly. (Options: radius).

* CLI only.

Web – Select Security, 802.1x, Configuration. Enable dot1x globally for the switch,

modify any of the parameters required, and then click Apply.

3-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Authentication.

CLI – This enables re-authentication and sets all of the global parameters for 802.1x

Console(config)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config)#dot1x max-req 5

Console(config)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 40

Console(config)#dot1x timeout re-auth 5

Console(config)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40

Console(config)#authentication dot1x default radius

Console(config)#

Configuring Port Authorization Mode

When dot1x is enabled, you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode

configured for each port.

Command Attributes

• Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.

• Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an

802.1X-authorized port. (Range: Single-Host, Multi-Host; Default: Single-Host)

• Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when

the Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-20; Default: 5)

• Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:

- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication

server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either

dot1x-aware or otherwise.

- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either

dot1x-aware or otherwise.

• Authorized

- Yes – Connected client is authorized.

- No – Connected client is not authorized.

- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.

• Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.

• Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.

Web – Click Security, 802.1x, Port Configuration. Select the authentication mode

from the drop-down box and click Apply.

3-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – This example sets the authentication mode to enable 802.1x on port 2, and

allows up to ten clients to connect to this port.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10

Console(config-if)#

4-70

Displaying 802.1x Statistics

This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.

Statistical Values

Parameter

Description

Rx EXPOL Start

The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this

Authenticator.

Rx EAPOL Logoff

Rx EAPOL Invalid

Rx EAPOL Total

Rx EAP Resp/Id

Rx EAP Resp/Oth

Rx EAP LenError

Rx Last EAPOLVer

Rx Last EAPOLSrc

Tx EAPOL Total

Tx EAP Req/Id

The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this

Authenticator.

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this

Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.

The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received

by this Authenticator.

The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this

Authenticator.

The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames)

that have been received by this Authenticator.

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this

Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.

The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL

frame.

The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL

frame.

The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by

this Authenticator.

The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this

Authenticator.

Tx EAP Req/Oth

The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have

been transmitted by this Authenticator.

Web – Select Security, 802.1x, Statistics. Select the required port and then click

Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.

3-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

CLI – This example displays the 802.1x statistics for port 4.

Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4

4-73

Eth 1/4

Rx: EXPOL

EAPOL

Logoff

EAPOL

Invalid

EAPOL

Total

1007

EAP

Start

Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError

672

Last

EAPOLVer

Last

EAPOLSrc

00-00-E8-98-73-21

Tx: EAPOL

Total

EAP

Req/Id

1005

EAP

Req/Oth

2017

Console#

Port Configuration

Displaying Connection Status

You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current

connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and

auto-negotiation.

Field Attributes (Web)

• Name – Interface label.

• Type – Indicates the port type.

(1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, or 100BASE-TX)

• Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.

• Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.

3-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

• Max MAC Count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be

learned by a port. (0 - 20 addresses)

• Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

• Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.

(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)

• Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.

• Trunk Member – Shows if port is a trunk member.

• Creation – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via

LACP.

1: Port Information only.

2: Trunk Information only

Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.

Command Attributes (CLI)

Basic information:

• Port type – Indicates the port type.

(1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, or 100BASE-TX)

• MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this item on

the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on page 3-11.)

Configuration:

• Name – Interface label.

• Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).

•

Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed

choice)

• Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during

auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see “Configuring Interface

Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.

- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

3-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

- Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control

- FC - Supports flow control

• Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.

• Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold. (500 - 262143

packets per second)

• Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.

• LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.

• Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.

• Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be

learned by a port. (0 - 20 addresses)

• Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is

detected. (none, shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown)

• Combo forced mode – Shows the forced/preferred port type to use for

combination ports 21-24. (copper forced, copper preferred auto, SFP forced, SFP

preferred auto)

Current status:

• Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.

• Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

• Port Operation Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.

• Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.

(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)

3-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/5

Basic information:

Port type: 1000T

Mac address: 00-30-f1-47-58-46

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second

Flow control: Disabled

Lacp: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Combo forced mode: None

Current status:

Link status: Down

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Console#

Configuring Interface Connections

You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an

interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually

fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.

Command Attributes

• Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an

interface due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then

reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also disable an

interface for security reasons.

• Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode.

• Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.

3-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

• Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/

disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities

to be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings

for speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.

- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or

clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause

frames. (The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames.)

- FC - Supports flow control

Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or

segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,

back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for

full-duplex operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub

unless it is actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure

jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached

to the hub.)

(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE-T –

10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH – 1000full;

100BASE-TX – 100full)

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and select

port members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 3-44.

Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface

to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow Control options.

Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required

interface settings, and click Apply.

3-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12

Console(config-if)#description RD SW#12

Console(config-if)#shutdown

4-85

Console(config-if)#no shutdown

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol

4-86

4-85

4-88

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#exit

4-87

Creating Trunk Groups

You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate

link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments

where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two

devices. You can create one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports.

The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control

Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the

link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. On the

other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with

LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure two Gigabit optional

module ports as LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static

trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the

other device will negotiate a trunk link between them.

Command Usage

Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide

redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails. However, before

making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to

specify the trunk on the devices at both ends. When using a port trunk, take note of

the following points:

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network

cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• You can create one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be

compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.

• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,

including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control),

VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added

or deleted from a VLAN.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.

3-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

Statically Configuring a Trunk

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, you may not

be able to link switches of different types,

depending on the manufacturer’s

statically

configured

implementation. However, note that the

static trunks on this switch are Cisco

EtherChannel compatible.

active

links

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be

sure you add a static trunk via the

configuration interface before connecting

the ports, and also disconnect the ports

before removing a static trunk via the

configuration interface.

Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-6 in the Trunk field,

select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you

have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

3-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 13 and 14. Just connect these ports to

two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/14

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 1000GBIC

Mac address: 00-01-00-02-00-10

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 1000full,

Flow control: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: User

Link status: Down

Operation speed-duplex: 1000full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/13, Eth1/14,

Console#

Enabling LACP on Selected Ports

Command Usage

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure

you enable LACP before connecting the ports,

and also disconnect the ports before disabling

LACP.

dynamically

enabled

active

links

backup

link

• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on

the connected ports, the trunk will be activated

automatically.

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP

will automatically be assigned the next

available trunk ID.

configured

members

• If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled,

the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if

one of the active links fails.

• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either

by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

3-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select switch ports from the scroll-down port

list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click

Apply.

CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 13 and 14. Just connect these

ports to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/14

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 1000GBIC

Mac address: 22-22-22-22-22-2d

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin status: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 1000full,

Flow control status: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Combo forced mode: None

Current status:

Created by: Lacp

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 1000full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/3, Eth1/14,

Console#

3-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds

Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if

application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too

much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or

everything can come to complete halt.

You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for

broadcast traffic for each port. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified

threshold will then be dropped.

Command Usage

• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.

• The default threshold is 500 packets per second.

• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.

• The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.

Command Attributes

• Threshold – Threshold in packets per second. (Options: 500-262143 packets

per second; Default: 500 packets per second)

• Broadcast Control Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has

been enabled. (Default: Enabled)

Web – Click Port, Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, set Broadcast Control Status

to enabled, then click Apply.

3-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables

broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600

packets per second for port 2. This threshold will then apply to all ports with

broadcast storm control enabled.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2

Information of Eth 1/2

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 packets/second

Lacp status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

Egress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0 Allowed Vlan:

1(u),

Forbidden Vlan:

Console#

Configuring Port Mirroring

You can mirror traffic from any source port to a

target port for real-time analysis. You can then

attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the

target port and study the traffic crossing the

source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.

Source

port(s)

Single

target

port

Command Usage

• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic

may be dropped from the monitor port.

• All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.

• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN

as the source port.

Command Attributes

• Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.

• Source Unit – The switch containing the mirror source port. This switch does

not support stacking , so this number will always be 1.

• Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored.

• Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive),

Tx (transmit), or Both.

• Target Unit – The switch containing the mirror target port. This switch does not

support stacking , so this number will always be 1.

• Target Port – The port that will “duplicate” or “mirror” the traffic on the source

port.

3-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click Port, Mirror. Specify the source port, the traffic type to be mirrored, and

the target port, then click Add.

CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port

monitor command to specify the source port. Note that default mirroring under the

CLI is for both received and transmitted packets.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#

4-95

Configuring Rate Limits

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic

transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at

the edge of a network to limit traffic coming out of the switch. Traffic that falls within

the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of

traffic are dropped.

Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is

configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to

verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded

without any changes.

Command Attribute

Rate Limit – Sets the output rate limit for an interface.

Default Status – Disabled

Default Rate – 100 Mbps for ports 1-12, 1000 Mbps for ports 13-14 with Gigabit

modules installed.

Range – 1 - 1000 Mbps

3-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

Web - Click Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration. Set the Input Rate

Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status, then set the rate limit for the individual

interfaces, and click Apply.

CLI - This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through

port 1 to 50 Mbps.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 50

Console(config-if)#rate-limit output 50

Console(config-if)#

4-97

Showing Port Statistics

You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and

Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON

MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing

through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with

the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics

provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different

frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been

accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second.

Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.

Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management

software such as HP OpenView.

3-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Statistical Values

Parameter

Description

Interface Statistics

Received Octets

The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing

characters.

Received Unicast Packets

Received Multicast Packets

Received Broadcast Packets

Received Discarded Packets

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer

protocol.

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,

which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,

which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.

The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even

though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a

higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet

could be to free up buffer space.

Received Unknown Packets

Received Errors

The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded

because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them

from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Transmit Octets

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including

framing characters.

Transmit Unicast Packets

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were

discarded or not sent.

Transmit Multicast Packets

Transmit Broadcast Packets

Transmit Discarded Packets

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this

sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be

transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this

sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even

though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.

One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up

buffer space.

Transmit Errors

The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of

errors.

Etherlike Statistics

Alignment Errors

Late Collisions

The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).

The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times

into the transmission of a packet.

FCS Errors

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral

number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does

not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.

Excessive Collisions

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due

to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the

interface is operating in full-duplex mode.

3-52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

Parameter

Description

Single Collision Frames

The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is

inhibited by exactly one collision.

Internal MAC Transmit Errors

Multiple Collision Frames

Carrier Sense Errors

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due

to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.

A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is

inhibited by more than one collision.

The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never

asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.

SQE Test Errors

A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the

PLS sublayer for a particular interface.

Frames Too Long

A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the

maximum permitted frame size.

Deferred Transmissions

Internal MAC Receive Errors

A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular

interface is delayed because the medium was busy.

A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to

an internal MAC sublayer receive error.

RMON Statistics

Drop Events

The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of

resources.

Jabbers

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS

or alignment error.

Received Bytes

Collisions

Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can

be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet

segment.

Received Frames

Broadcast Frames

The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.

The total number of good frames received that were directed to the

broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

Multicast Frames

The total number of good frames received that were directed to this

multicast address.

CRC/Alignment Errors

Undersize Frames

The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).

The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well

formed.

Oversize Frames

Fragments

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well

formed.

The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length

(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS

or alignment error.

3-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Parameter

Description

64 Bytes Frames

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and

transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but

including FCS octets).

65-127 Byte Frames

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and

transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range

(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

128-255 Byte Frames

256-511 Byte Frames

512-1023 Byte Frames

1024-1518 Byte Frames

1519-1536 Byte Frames

Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click Query. You

can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.

3-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Port Configuration

CLI – This example shows statistics for port 12.

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/12

Ethernet 1/12

4-92

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122

Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027

Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552

Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871

3-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

VDSL Configuration

You can configure and display communication parameters for VDSL and Ethernet

ports on the switch and connected CPEs.

VDSL Global Configuration

This Web page assigns the same profile to each VDSL switch port. Details of these

profiles are given in the table below.

Profile Name

ProfileType

Downstream Rate

(Mbps)

Upstream Rate

(Mbps)

Default

Public

Private

1.20

1.40

2.43

3.78

4.72

7.56

10.40

16.47

16.20

11.34

3.24

5.13

7.29

3.24

5.13

7.29

5.40

40.50

A1-02OAG-R1

A2-02OAG-R1

A3-01OAG-R1

A4-01OAG-R1

S1-03OAG-R1

S2-03OAG-R1

S3-00OAG-R1

S1-16-16

7.56

10.80

17.28

25.92

7.56

10.80

17.28

16.74

33.75

25.38

44.55

50.49

22.55

40.91

46.44

17.01

71.28

S2-16-16A

A1-34-11

A2-34-11A

A3-25-3

A4-45-5

A5-50-7

A6-22-3A

A7-40-5A

A8-46-7A

TLAN

Max-Rate

Notes: 1. The VDSL Intelligent Switch uses Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM), a

VDSL-based technology.

2. A suffix of “A” in the profile name (e.g., S2-16-16A) indicate that this profile is

for both VDSL and ADSL lines in a bundle. Profiles without a suffix of “A” in

the profile name (e.g., S1-16-16) are for VDSL lines only.

3. The following profiles are recommended for use with this switch: S1-16-16,

S2-16-16A, A1-34-11, and A2-34-11A.

3-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

4. The maximum distances for VDSL links using the recommended profiles are:

Upstream

16 Mbps

Downstream

16 Mbps

Mode

Max. Range

600m (1970 ft)

610m (2000 ft)

Symmetric

Asymetric

11 Mbps

34 Mbps

5. Type-1 26 AWG (100 ohm)/0.4 mm, or Type-2 24 AWG (100 ohm)/0.5 mm

cable may be installed to achieve the maximum distance. However, typically,

24 AWG (100 ohm)/0.5 mm wire is better than 26 AWG (100 ohm)/0.4 mm

wire. Note that the distance may be limited by factors such as how the cable

is bundled, and the interference and noise on the link.

6. Public profiles conform to specific standards such as ANSI or ETSI. Private

profiles do not conform to these standards.

Command Attributes

• Profile Name – The name for the specific set of communication parameters.

• Profile Type – Public profiles are those that meet specific standards e.g., ETSI

or ANSI. Private profiles do not meet these standards. The ports on a VDSL

switch can be assigned the same or different profiles.

• Downstream Rate – Rate of data transmission from the switch to the CPE.

• Upstream Rate – Rate of data transmission from the CPE to the switch.

Web – Click VDSL, Global Configuration, and select a profile from the drop-down

list.

CLI – This example shows how to configure all VDSL ports on the switch to profile

S1-16-16.

Example

Console#config

Console(config)#efm profile global S1-16-16

Console(config)#

4-102

3-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

VDSL Port Configuration

You can enable/disable a selected port, enable/disable Remote Digital Loopback

(RDL), set the optimal transmission rate, and configure a profile for the selected

port.

Command Attributes

• Active Status – Check this box to enable the selected port.

• RDL – Check this box to enable Remote Digital Loopback (RDL). Remote

Digital Loopback (RDL) tests the link between the switch and the CPE by

sending out, and returning data through the CPE, over the VDSL link

(see “efm rdl” on page 4-105). (Default: Disabled)

• Profile – Configures a profile for the selected port.

• PBO – Enables/disables power back-off on the selected port. If PBO is enabled

the power of transmission from the port will automatically be adjusted to ensure

that the signal successfully reaches the receive port.

• Rate Adaptation – The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors

such as temperature, humidity, and electro-magnetic radiation. When rate

adaption is enabled, the switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for

the current conditions.

• Noise Margin – When rate adaptation is enabled, the Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(SNR) is an indicator of link quality. The switch itself has no internal functions to

ensure link quality. To ensure a stable link, you should add a margin to the

theoretical minimum Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). The table below lists

theoretical ninimum SNR’s for the VDSL profiles configurable on this switch.

Profile Name

Theoretical Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB)

DS1

DS2

Not Used

US1

US2

Not Used

Default

A1-02OAG-R1

A2-02OAG-R1

A3-01OAG-R1

A4-01OAG-R1

S1-03OAG-R1

S2-03OAG-R1

S3-00OAG-R1

S1-16-16

Not Used

A1-34-11

S2-16-16A

A2-34-11A

A3-25-3

Not used

A4-45-5

3-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

Theoretical Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB)

Profile Name

DS1

DS2

US1

US2

A5-50-7

A6-22-3A

A7-40-5A

A8-46-7A

TLAN

Not Used

Max-Rate

Noise margins should be configured to a level appropriate to the actual noise

level of the environment. A noisier environment requires a higher noise margin

to ensure a stable link. The noise margin only comes into effect after a link is

activated. Increasing the noise margin can result in the switch choosing a lower

profile. This will provide a link with a longer range but a lower data rate.

Example

The table below gives an example of a noise margin for a given profile and

theoretical minimum SNR.

Profile Name

Downstream

Rate (Mbps)

Upstream Rate

(Mbps)

SNR

Noise Margin

(dB)

S1-16-16

16.74

Range; 0-9 dB. Default: 0 dB

• Interleave – Interleaving improves Reed-Solomon error correction when there

is pulse noise. A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection

against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the

effective bandwidth of the link. The degree of interleaving can be increased by

increasing the following parameters:

- M – The interleaving depth index.

Range: 0-64, Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 16

- I – The interleaver block length.

Options: 4 or 8; Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 8

3-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click VDSL, Port Configuration. Select a port from the drop-down list, and

click Select.

CLI – The following examples show how these features are configured in the CLI.

Examples

The following example disables VDSL port 1.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm shutdown

Console(config-if)#

4-104

The following example shows how to enable/disable RDL on VDSL port 1.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm rdl

Console(config-if)#no efm rdl

Console(config-if)#

4-105

The following example assigns efm profile S1-16-16 to VDSL port 1.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm profile S1-16-16

Console(config-if)#

4-103

The following example enables power back-off for port 1.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm pbo

Console(config-if)#

4-109

3-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

The following example shows rate adaption enabled for port 1.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm rate-adapt

Console(config-if)#end

Console#

4-108

The following example configures VDSL port 1 with an upstream noise margin of 6,

and a downstream noise margin of 6.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm noise-margin 6 6

Console(config-if)#end

4-107

Console#

The following example configures VDSL port 1 with:

•

M - downstream value: 16, Upstream value: 8

I - downstream value: 8, Upstream value: 8

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm interleave 16 8 8 8

Console(config-if)#end

4-106

Console#show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1/1

Interface

Link

SNR (dB)

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

RS Errs

Interleaver

DS.M DS.I US.M US.I PBO

------------- ---- -------------------- -------- ------------------- ---

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

43.0 35.0 45.0 43.0 0

8 on

VDSL Port Link Status

Command Attributes

• General Status

- Link – Shows the status of the VDSL link.

- Noise Margin – To ensure a stable link, you should add a margin to the

theoretical minimum Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). For details see “VDSL Port

Configuration” on page 3-58.

Range: 0-9 dBm. Default: 0 dBm

• PMD Status

- SNR (dB) –The signal-to-noise ratio of the VDSL line.

- Downstream Rate (Mbps) – The rate at which data is transmitted from the

switch to the CPE.

- Upstream Rate (Mbps) – The rate at which data is transmitted from the CPE

to the switch.

1 Physical Media Dependent

3-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

- PBO – Indicates the status of the power back-off mechanism (on/off). If PBO

is enabled, the power of transmission from the port will automatically be

adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port.

- Rate Adaptation – The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors

such as temperature, humidity, and electro-magnetic radiation. When rate

adaption is enabled, the switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for

the current conditions.

• PMS-TC Status

- Reed-Solomon Errors – The number of errors in data that have been

corrected by the Reed-Solomon code.

- Interleave – Interleaving improves Reed-Solomon error correction when

there is pulse noise. A greater degree of interleaving will provide more

protection against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce

the effective bandwidth of the link. The degree of interleaving can be

increased by increasing the following parameters:

- M – The interleaving depth index.

Range: 0-64, Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 16

- I – The interleaving block length.

Options: 4 or 8; Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 8

2 Physical Medium Specific-Transmission Convergence

Web – Click VDSL, Port Link Status.

3-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

CLI –The following examples show how VDSL link current values are displayed in

the CLI.

Examples

The following example displays VDSL link current values on VDSL switch port 2.

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual dsrserrs

Downstream Reed-Solomon errors: 0

4-111

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual link

Link status: Down

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual rxpower

Local receive power: 26.00 dBm/Hz

Console#show controller lre Ethernet 1/2 actual snr

SNR: 27.00 dB

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual txpower

Remote transmit power: -89.70 dBm/Hz

Console#

The following example displays link status, signal-to-noise ratios, Reed-Solomon

errors, interleaver parameters and PBO status on VDSL switch port 1.

Console#show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1/1

4-114

Interface

Link

SNR (dB)

RS Errs

Interleaver

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

DS.M DS.I US.M US.I PBO

------------- ---- -------------------- -------- ------------------- ---

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

43.0 35.0 45.0 43.0 0

8 on

This command displays the downstream and upstream rates of the VDSL port 1.

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/1 admin usrate

Upstream rate: 12.50 Mbps

4-112

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/1 admin dsrate

Downstream rate: 12.50 Mbps

Console#

3-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Displaying VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics

VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics display key statistics for an interface.

Web – Click VDSL, VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics.

3-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

CLI – Use the show interfaces counters command.

Example

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/11

Ethernet 1/11

4-92

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 19648, Octets output: 714944

Unitcast input: 0, Unitcast output: 0

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 10524

Broadcast input: 136, Broadcast output: 0

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 734720, Packets: 10661

Broadcast pkts: 136, Multi-cast pkts: 10525

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 9877, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 93

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 691, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 0

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0

Console#

VDSL Line Configuration

Command Attributes

• Line – Select the VDSL line for configuration from the drop-down list.

• Local/Remote – In this version this may only be set to Local, indicating that the

line configuration applies to the line connection from the switch to the CPE.

• Coding – Specifies the VDSL coding type used on this line.

The types of code are:

1. Others (none of the following)

2. Multiple Carrier Modulation

3. Single Carrier Modulation

• Type – Defines the type of VDSL physical line by defining whether and how the

line is channelized.

The types of line are:

1. No channels exist

2. Only fast channels exist

3. Only interleaved channels exists

4. Either fast or interleaved channels exist

5. Both fast and interleaved channels exist

3-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

• Config Profile – In this version, only “DEFVAL” is displayed. In future versions,

a drop-down list of all configurable VDSL profiles will be displayed in this field.

• Alarm Config Profile – The alarm profile is pre-configured to send trap

messages via SNMP protocol to register errors on the VDSL line.

Web – Click VDSL, Line Configuration. Select the line from the drop-down list, and

click Query.

CLI – Use the show controllers efm line-table command.

Example

Console#show controllers efm line-table

VDSL_LINE_ENTRY :

4-117

Ethernet 1/1

Line Coding

Line Type

Line Config Profile

Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL

DEFVAL

VDSL_LINE_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/12

Console#

Line Coding

Line Type

Line Config Profile

Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL

DEFVAL

Displaying VDSL Interface Information

This Web screen displays physical interface information and channel interface

information for a selected VDSL line.

Command Attributes

• Line – Select the VDSL line from the drop-down list.

• Channel – Select Slow or Fast from the drop-down menu. The switch uses the

slow channel for data that requires a very low error rate in transmission. The

switch uses the fast channel for data such as voice/video signals that require

fast delivery, but for which a small error rate is acceptable.

• Side – This only displays Local. All information displayed is for data

transmission from the switch to the CPE.

3-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

• Physical Interfaces Information

- Serial Number – A number given by the manufacturer to the item produced.

This only displays on the CPE side.

- Vendor ID – The name of the manufacturer of this switch.

- Version Number – The number of the current hardware.

- Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin – To ensure a stable link, you should

add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). For

details see “VDSL Port Configuration” on page 3-58.

Range: 0-9 dBm Default: 0 dBm

- Current Attenuation – The attenuation of the signal.

Units: db

- Current Status – This displays defects in the VDSL line. In the current

version, this always displays 0, which means no defects.

- Current Output Power – The total output power transmitted on this line.

Units: 0.1 dBm

- Current Attainable Rate – The maximum line data rate using the current

profile.

Unit: Bits per second

- Current Line Rate – The current line data rate.

Unit: Bits per second

• Channel Interface Information

- Interleave Delay – Transmission delay caused by the use of interleaving.

Units: Milliseconds

- CRC Block Length – Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) is a number derived

from, and transmitted with, data frames in order to detect corruption of data.

- Current Transmit Rate* – The current rate of data transmission.

- Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect* – Actual level of impulse noise

(burst) protection for an interleaved (slow) channel. This parameter is not

applicable to fast channels. For fast channels, a value of zero is returned.

- Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction* – Actual Forward Error

Correction (FEC) redundancy related overhead for a fast channel. This

parameter is not applicable to an interleaved (slow) channel. For interleaved

channels, a value of zero is returned.

* Not supported in the current version

3-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click VDSL, Interface Information. Select Line and Channel from the

drop-down lists, and click Query.

CLI – The following examples show how these parameters are displayed in the CLI.

Examples

The following example displays physical interface information for VDSL

port 1.

Console#show controllers efm phy-table vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_PHYS_ENTRY :

4-118

Ethernet 1/1

Serial Number

Vendor ID

Version Number

Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin 45

Current Attenuation

Current Status

Current Output Power

Current Attainable Rate

Current Line Rate

ACCTON

-12

1350000

Console#

The following example displays channel interface information for VDSL

port 1.

Console#show controllers efm channel-table vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_CHAN_ENTRY :

4-119

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

Channel Interleave Delay

Channel CRC Block Length

Channel Current Transmit Rate

Channel Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect

Channel Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction

3-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

VDSL Performance Monitor Information

This screen displays line and channel performance data information since the switch

was last reset, during the current 15 minute interval, and during the current day.

Command Attributes

• Line – Select the VDSL line from the drop-down list.

• Channel – Select Slow or Fast from the drop-down menu. The switch uses the

slow channel for data that requires a very low error rate in transmission. The

switch uses the fast channel for data such as voice/video signals that require

fast delivery, but for which a small error rate is acceptable

• Side – This only displays Local. All information displayed is for data

transmission from the switch to the CPE.

• Line Performance Data Information

- Loss of Frame (LOF) – Number of seconds that there was loss of framing,

since the switch was last reset, or in the indicated time interval.

- Loss of Signal (LOS) – Number of seconds that there was loss of signal,

since the switch was last reset, or in the indicated time interval.

- Loss of Power – Number of seconds that there was loss of power, since the

switch was last reset, or in the indicated time interval.

- Loss of Link – Number of seconds that there was loss of link, since the switch

was last reset, or in the indicated time interval.

- Errored Second – Number of Errored Seconds since the switch was last

reset, or in the indicated time interval. An Errored Second is a one-second

interval containing one or more CRC anomalies, or one or more LOS or LOF

defects.

- Severely Errored Second – Number of Severely Errored Seconds since the

switch was last reset, or in the indicated time interval. An Errored Second is a

one-second interval containing one or more CRC anomalies, or one or more

LOS or LOF defects.

- Unavailable Second – Number of Unavailable Seconds since the switch was

last reset, or in the indicated time interval.

- Init – Number of line initialization attempts since the switch was last reset, or

in the indicated time interval. This count includes both successful and failed

attempts.

- Valid intervals – The number of intervals within which no errors have been

detected.

- Invalid Intervals – The number of intervals within which errors have been

detected.

• Channel Performance Data Information

- Current Time Elapsed – The time elapsed in minutes.

- Current Fixed Octet – The number of corrected octets.

- Current Bad Block – The number of uncorrectable blocks.

- Current Valid Interval – The number of intervals within which no errors have

been detected.

- Current invalid Interval – The number of intervals within which errors have

been detected.

3-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click VDSL, Performance Monitor Information.

3-70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

CLI – Use the show controllers efm current-performance command.

Example

Console#show controllers efm current-performance vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_PERF_DATA_ENTRY :

4-120

Ethernet 1/1

Loss of Framing

Loss of Signal

Loss of Power

Loss of Link

Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Line Initialization Attempts 0

Ethernet 1/1

Elapsed Seconds at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Framing at inteval 15 minutes

Loss of Signal at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Power at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Link at interval 15 minutes

Errored Second at interval 15 minutes

Severely Errored Second at interval 15 minutes

Unavailable Second at interval 15 minutes

Line Initialization Attempts at interval 15 minutes

Valid Intervals at interval 15 minutes

Invalid Intervals at interval 15 minutes

Ethernet 1/1

Time Elapsed at interval 1 day

Loss of Frame at interval 1 day

10861

Ethernet 1/1

Valid Intervals at interval 1 day

Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

VDSL_CHAN_PERF_DATA_ENTRY : (SLOW)

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Current Fixed Octets

Channel Current Bad Block

Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 15 minutes

Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 15 minutes

Channel Current Bad Block at interval 15 minutes

Channel Valid Intervals

276

Channel Invalid Intervals

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 1 day

Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 1 day

Channel Current Bad Block at interval 1 day

Channel Valid Intervals at interval 1 day

Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

11076

VDSL_CHAN_PERF_DATA_ENTRY : (FAST)

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

Channel Current Fixed Octets

Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

3-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Monitoring VDSL Performance History

This page displays line and channel performance data information during selected

15 minute intervals over the last 24 hours of switch operation, and during selected

1-day intervals from the current day to 30 days ago.

Command Attributes

• Line – Select the VDSL line from the drop-down list.

• Channel – Select Slow or Fast from the drop-down list.

• Side – This only displays Local. All information displayed is for data

transmission from the switch to the CPE.

• Line Performance Data History Information

For the 15 Min Interval column, interval 1 is the most recent interval; interval 96

is 24 hours ago.

For the 1 Day Interval column, interval 1 is the most recent day; interval 30 is 30

days ago.

- Loss of Frame (LOF) – Number of seconds that there was loss of framing in

the indicated time interval.

- Loss of Signal (LOS) – Number of seconds that there was loss of signal in

the indicated time interval.

- Loss of Power – Number of seconds that there was loss of power in the

indicated time interval.

- Loss of Link – Number of seconds that there was loss of link in the indicated

time interval.

- Errored Second – Number of errored seconds in the indicated time interval.

An errored second is a one-second interval containing one or more CRC

anomalies, or one or more LOS or LOF defects.

- Severely Errored Second – Number of severely errored seconds in the

indicated time interval. An errored second is a one-second interval containing

one or more one or more CRC anomalies, or one or more LOS or LOF

defects.

- Unavailable Second – Count of unavailable seconds in the indicated time

interval.

- Init – Number of line initialization attempts in the indicated time interval. This

count includes both successful and failed attempts.

• Channel Performance Data History Information

- Fixed Octet – Number of corrected octets in the indicated time interval.

- Bad Block – Number of uncorrectable blocks in the indicated time interval.

3-72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

Web – Click VDSL, Performance Monitor History.

Note: The parameters described above are not displayed in the CLI for periods before

the current 15 minute, or 24 hour interval. To display these parameters during the

current 15 minute, or 24 hour period see “VDSL Performance Monitor Information”

on page 3-69.

Address Table Settings

Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass

traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned

by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually

configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.

Setting Static Addresses

A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static

addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static

address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be

written to the address table.

Command Attributes

• Static Address Counts* – The number of manually configured addresses.

• Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.

• Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.

• MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

* Web Only

3-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the MAC

address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.

CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be

deleted when the switch is reset.

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface

ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

Console(config)#

4-122

Displaying the Address Table

The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the

source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for

inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are

forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.

• MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on

MAC address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).

3-74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Configuration

Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type (i.e., mark

the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the

displayed addresses, and then click Query.

CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.

Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1

Interface Mac Address Vlan Type

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE

Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60

1 Permanent

2 Learned

Console#

Changing the Aging Time

You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.

Command Attributes

• Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.

• Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.

(Range: 10-1000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

3-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.

CLI – This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds.

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400

Console(config)#

4-124

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network

loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows

the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch,

bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any

two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over

when a primary link goes down.

The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w) STA uses a distributed

algorithm to select a bridging device (STA-compliant switch, bridge or router)

that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on

each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path

cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. It selects a

designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost

when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. It then selects a port

on the designated bridging device to communicate with each attached LAN or

host device as a designated port. After determining the lowest cost spanning

tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports.

Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and

designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.

Designated

Root

Port

Designated

Port

Designated

Bridge

Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello

BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge.

3-76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age),

the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then

initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a

valid network topology.

RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP. RSTP

achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around one tenth of the time required by

STP) by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning,

predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails, and

retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree

structure when reconfiguration occurs.

Displaying Global Settings

You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the

entire switch using the STA Information screen.

Field Attributes

• Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an

STA-compliant network.

• Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority

and MAC address (where the address is taken from the switch system).

• Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving

a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports

(except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular

intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last

configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it

is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached

to the network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which

includes both ports and trunks.)

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a

configuration message.

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait

before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is

required because every device must receive information about topology

changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to

listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state;

otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

• Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning

Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root.

This switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no

root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the

Spanning Tree network.

- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root

device.

3-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

• Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been

reconfigured.

• Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)

• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and

designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root

device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest

MAC address will then become the root device.

• Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a

configuration message.

• Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait

without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All

device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration

messages at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information

(provided in the last configuration message), a new root port is selected from

among the device ports attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this

section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

• Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait

before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is

required because every device must receive information about topology

changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to

listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state;

otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

• Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of

consecutive RSTP BPDUs.

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between

devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can

be assigned to each interface.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.

3-78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode

:RSTP

Spanning tree enable/disable

Priority

:enable

:32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.)

Bridge Max Age (sec.)

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)

Root Hello Time (sec.)

Root Max Age (sec.)

Root Forward Delay (sec.)

Designated Root

:20

:15

:20

:15

:32768.000087654321

Current root port

Current root cost

Number of topology changes

:200000

Last topology changes time (sec.):23771

Transmission limit

Path Cost Method

:long

Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not

connected to the network.

Configuring Global Settings

Global settings apply to the entire switch.

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

• RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the

incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol

messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP BPDU) after a

port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an

802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an

RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration

delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

Command Attributes

Basic Configuration of Global Settings

• Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default:

Enabled)

• Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is

selected, the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).

- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.

3-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and

designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root

device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest

MAC address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values

indicate higher priority.)

- Default: 32768

- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096

- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,

40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440

Root Device Configuration

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a

configuration message.

- Default: 2

- Minimum: 1

- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]

• Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without

receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device

ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at

regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last

configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it

is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached

to the network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which

includes both ports and trunks.)

- Default: 20

- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].

- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before

changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is

required because every device must receive information about topology

changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to

listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state;

otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

- Default: 15

- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]

- Maximum: 30

Configuration Settings for RSTP

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between

devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can

be assigned to each interface.

- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.

(This is the default.)

- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.

• Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified

by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive

protocol messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)

3-80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and

click Apply.

CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, and then configures the STA

parameters.

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Displaying Interface Settings

The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current

status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.

Command Attributes

• Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.

• STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree:

- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward

packets.

- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by

the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port

address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.

- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

3-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

The rules defining port status are:

- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is

always forwarding.

- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no

other STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID

forwards packets and the other is discarding.

- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change

state to learning, and then to forwarding.

• Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the

Learning state to the Forwarding state.

• Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in

the current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the

cost.

• Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device

through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning

Tree.

• Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated

bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the

Spanning Tree.

• Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment

attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration

or by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port

Configuration on page 3-84.

• Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge

Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3-84 (i.e., true or false), but will be set

to false if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this

port.

• Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the

active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port),

connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port);

or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges,

bridge ports, or LANs fail or are removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e.,

disabled port) if a port has no role within the spanning tree.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Information only)

R: Root Port

Alternate port receives more

useful BPDUs from another

bridge and is therefore not

selected as the designated

port.

A: Alternate Port

D: Designated Port

B: Backup Port

3-82

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

Backup port receives more

useful BPDUs from the same

bridge and is therefore not

selected as the designated

port.

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.

• Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path

between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached

to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path

cost takes precedence over port priority.)

• Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning

Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

• Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin Edge

port, and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.

• Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a

LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end

nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the

spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker

convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current

forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild

address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree

to reconfigure when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other

STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should only

be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a

point-to-point link or to shared media.

3-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk Information.

CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.

Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5

Eth 1/ 5 information

-------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status

Role

: enable

: disable

State

Path cost

: discarding

: 100000

Priority

: 128

Designated cost

Designated port

Designated root

Designated bridge

Fast forwarding

: 200000

: 128.5

: 61440.0.0000E9313131

: enable

Forward transitions : 0

Admin edge port

Oper edge port

Admin Link type

Oper Link type

: enable

: auto

: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status : enable

Configuring Interface Settings

You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port priority, path

cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path cost for ports

of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to indicate a

point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to indicate if

the attached device can support fast forwarding.

Command Attributes

The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:

• STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.

(See “Displaying Interface Settings” on page 3-81 for additional information.)

- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward

packets.

- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by

the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port

address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.

- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

3-84

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Configuration only)

The following interface attributes can be configured:

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol.

If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest

priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning

Tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the

Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port

is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be

enabled.

- Default: 128

- Range: 0-240, in steps of 16

• Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path

between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached

to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path

cost takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method

is set to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.

- Range

- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000

- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000

- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000

- Default

- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000

- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000

- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a

point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)

• Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an

interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to

an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass

directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports

provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers,

retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding

required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause

the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state,

and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember

that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node

device. (Default: Disabled)

3-85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

• Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including

Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set

the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also

use the Protocol Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU

format (RSTP or STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces.

(Default: Disabled)

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify

the required attributes, then click Apply.

CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto

Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration

Console(config-if)#

VLAN Configuration

Overview

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into

separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs

to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs

confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast

storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network

environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the

network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a

new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily

organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups

(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as

videoconferencing).

3-86

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow

you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets.

VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass

through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This switch supports the following VLAN features:

• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard

• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit

tagging

• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs

• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs

• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices

• Priority tagging

Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN

group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as

untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or

more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of

the connection supports VLANs. Then manually assign ports on the other

VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same

VLAN(s). However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more

VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end

of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an

untagged port.

Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network

interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing

it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.

tagged frames

VA: VLAN Aware

VU: VLAN Unaware

tagged

frames

untagged

frames

VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in

one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an

associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the

frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast

domain of the frame.

3-87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly

shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or

printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to

communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.

Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce

broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a

VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the

switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same

VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.

Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames

If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a

single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to

participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a

VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.

Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the

switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. When forwarding

a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN-aware devices, the

switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a frame from this switch along a

path that does not contain any VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host),

the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the

switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by

the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a

VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a

VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.

Displaying Basic VLAN Information

The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type

supported by the switch.

Field Attributes

• VLAN Version Number* – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified

in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.

• Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of VLANs that

can be configured on this switch.

* Web Only

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.

3-88

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

CLI – Enter the following command.

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support vlan numbers: 255

Max support vlan ID: 4093

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

Displaying Current VLANs

The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and

whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN

group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging. However, if you just

want to create a small port-based VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable

tagging.

Command Attributes (Web)

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093)

• Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up Time)

• Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch

- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP*

- Permanent: Added as a static entry

• Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members

• Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members

* Not supported in the current version

3-89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down

list.

Command Attributes (CLI)

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes)

• Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch

- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP*

- Static: Added as a static entry

* Not supported in the current version

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters)

• Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled

- Active: VLAN is operational

- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets

• Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members

CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.

Console#show vlan id 1

VLAN Type Name

---- ------- ---------------- --------- ----------------------------------------

4-143

Status

Ports/Channel groups

1 Static

DefaultVlan

Active Eth1/ 1 Eth1/ 2 Eth1/ 3 Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

Eth1/ 6 Eth1/ 7 Eth1/ 8 Eth1/ 9 Eth1/10

Eth1/11 Eth1/12 Eth1/13 Eth1/14

Console#

3-90

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

Creating VLANs

Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate

information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you

must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.

Command Attributes

• Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255

VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN.

• New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN

group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not

added to the VLAN tag.)

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093, no leading zeroes).

• VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Enable: VLAN is operational.

- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Active: VLAN is operational.

- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.

• Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned

to this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the

VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and

then click Add.

CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active

Console(config-vlan)#end

4-138

Console#show vlan

4-143

VLAN Type

Name

Status

Ports/Channel groups

---- ------- ---------------- --------- ----------------------------------

1 Static

DefaultVlan

Active Eth1/ 1 Eth1/ 2 Eth1/ 3 Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

Eth1/ 6 Eth1/ 7 Eth1/ 8 Eth1/ 9 Eth1/10

Eth1/11 Eth1/12 Eth1/13 Eth1/14 Eth1/15

Eth1/16 Eth1/17 Eth1/18 Eth1/19 Eth1/20

Eth1/21 Eth1/22 Eth1/23 Eth1/24

Active

2 Static

R&D

Console(config-vlan)#

3-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)

Notes: 1. Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected

VLAN index. Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q

VLAN compliant devices, or untagged they are not connected to any

VLAN-aware devices.You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by

Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index (page 3-93).

However, note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as

tagged members.

2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and

can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as

described under “Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-94.

Command Attributes

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Enable: VLAN is operational.

- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Port – Port identifier.

• Trunk – Trunk identifier.

• Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking

the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:

- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the

port will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS

information.

- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the

port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or

CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one

group as an untagged port.

- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this

VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to

the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.

3-92

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the

scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the

membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or

trunks. Click Apply.

CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)

Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the

selected interface as a tagged member.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Port or trunk identifier.

• Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.

• Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.

3-93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership. Select an interface from the

scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership information for

the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged

member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After configuring VLAN

membership for each interface, click Apply.

CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes Port 3

from VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2

Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces

You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN

identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, and ingress filtering.

Command Attributes

• PVID – VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface.

(Default: 1)

If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,

the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member.

For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged

member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types,

including tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to

receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to

the default VLAN. (Option: All, Tagged; Default: All)

3-94

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

• Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for

which the ingress port is not a member. (Default: Disabled)

- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for

which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except

for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for

which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as STP.

However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

• GARP Join Timer* – The interval between transmitting requests/queries to

participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)

• GARP Leave Timer* – The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group.

This time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after

a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before

the port actually leaves the group. (Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)

• GARP LeaveAll Timer* – The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query

message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This

interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the

amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group.

(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)

• Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface. (Default: 1Q Trunk)

- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a

direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that

identify the source VLAN. However, note that frames belonging to the port’s

default VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are sent untagged.

- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or

untagged frames.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the

selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.

* Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer

3-95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration.

Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.

CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns PVID 3 as the

native VLAN ID, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

Configuring Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the

assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,

uplink ports. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously

within the same switch.)

Uplink Ports

Primary VLAN

(promiscuous ports)

Downlink Ports

Secondary VLAN

(private ports)

3-96

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Configuration

Enabling Private VLANs

Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable/disable the Private VLAN function.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Status. Select Enable or Disable from the

scroll-down box, and click Apply.

CLI – This example enables private VLANs.

Console(config)#pvlan

Console(config)#

Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports

Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports.

Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the

switch except for the uplink ports. Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports

on the switch and with any designated downlink ports.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Link Status. Check the ports that will serve as

uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN, then click Apply.

3-97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – This example configures ports 13 and 14 as uplink ports and ports 1-8 as

downlink ports.

Console(config)#Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/13-14 down-link

ethernet 1/1-8

Console(config)#end

Console#show pvlan

Private VLAN status: Enabled

Up-link port:

Ethernet 1/13

Ethernet 1/14

Down-link port:

Ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/3

Ethernet 1/4

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

Console#

Console(config)#

Class of Service Configuration

Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater

precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch

supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s

high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You

can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame

priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces

You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch. All untagged

packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and

then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.

Command Usage

• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses Weighted Round

Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.

• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to

accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This

priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming

frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits

will be used.

• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames

are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.

3-98

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class of Service Configuration

Command Attributes

• Default Priority* – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on

the specified interface. (Range: 0 - 7, Default: 0)

• Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for

each port.

* The CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”

Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority. Modify the default

priority for any interface, then click Apply.

CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/5

4-93

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second

Lacp status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

Egress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0

Gvrp status: Disabled*

Allowed Vlan:

Forbidden Vlan:

Console#

1(u),

* Not supported in the current version

3-99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues

This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using four

priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted

Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE

802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in

the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.

Queue

Priority

1, 2

0, 3

4, 5

6, 7

The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network

applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority

levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for

your own network.

Priority Level

Traffic Type

Background

(Spare)

0 (default)

Best Effort

Excellent Effort

Controlled Load

Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter

Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter

Network Control

Command Attributes

• Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)

• Traffic Class* – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the highest CoS

priority queue)

* CLI shows Queue ID

3-100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class of Service Configuration

Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. Mark an interface and click Select to display

the current mapping of CoS values to output queues. Assign priorities to the traffic

classes (i.e., output queues) for the selected interface, then click Apply.

CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a

one-to-one mapping.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config)#queue cos-map 0 0

Console(config)#queue cos-map 1 1

Console(config)#queue cos-map 2 2

Console(config)#exit

4-150

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

4-151

Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3

* Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration

command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

Selecting the Queue Mode

You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all

traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are

serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative

weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that

determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before

moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur

with strict priority queuing.

Command Attributes

• WRR – Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using

scheduling weights 1, 4, 16, and 64 for queues 0 through 3 respectively.

(This is the default selection.)

• Strict – Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic

in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or Wrr, then click Apply.

3-101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.

Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue mode

4-151

Queue mode: strict

Console#

Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes

This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the

frequency at which it services each priority queue. As described in “Mapping CoS

Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-100, the traffic classes are mapped to one of

the four egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of

these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets

the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently

affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.

Command Attributes

• WRR Setting Table* – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class

(i.e., queue).

• Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class. (Range: 1-255)

* CLI shows Queue ID.

Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Select the interface, highlight a traffic class

(i.e., output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.

3-102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class of Service Configuration

CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the

priority queues.

Console(config)#queue bandwidth 2 8 16 128

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue bandwidth

Queue ID Weight

4-149

4-151

-------- ------

128

Console#

Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values

This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet

application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a

frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the

TCP port. If priority bits are used, the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP

Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When

these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by

the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.

Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch

maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, and

then Default Port Priority.

• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of

these priority types will automatically disable the other.

Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority

The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority.

Select one of the methods or disable this feature.

Command Attributes

• Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)

• IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.

• IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point

Mapping.

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select Disabled,

IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu.

3-103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#

4-152

Mapping IP Precedence

The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits

defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control

packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The default IP Precedence values are

mapped one-to-one to Class of Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to

CoS value 0, and so forth). Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other

bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.

Priority

Level

Traffic Type

Priority

Level

Traffic Type

Network Control

Internetwork Control

Critical

Flash

Immediate

Priority

Routine

Flash Override

Command Attributes

• IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence

value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP Precedence

Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.

3-104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class of Service Configuration

CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch,

maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP

Precedence settings.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

4-152

4-153

Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1

Precedence mapping status: enabled

4-156

Port

Precedence COS

--------- ---------- ---

Eth 1/ 1

Console#

* Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration

command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

Mapping DSCP Priority

The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding

behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility

with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices,

will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Based on network policies, different kinds of

traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are

defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified

are mapped to CoS value 0.

IP DSCP Value

CoS Value

10, 12, 14, 16

18, 20, 22, 24

26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36

38, 40, 42

46, 56

Command Attributes

• DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value.

Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.

3-105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a

value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.

CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch,

maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority

settings.

Console(config)#map ip dscp

4-153

4-154

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1

DSCP mapping status: enabled

4-156

Port

DSCP COS

--------- ---- ---

Eth 1/ 1

Console#

* Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command,

but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

3-106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class of Service Configuration

Mapping IP Port Priority

In the IP Port Priority page, for each switch port or trunk, you can map IP ports

(TCP/UDP ports) to the switch’s 4 traffic class queues.

Command Attributes

• Current IP Port Table – displays a list of IP ports with their mapped class of

service queues.

• IP Port – to set a new IP port number.

• Class of Service – to set a new class of service for an IP port. Note that “0”

represents low priority and “3” represent high priority

Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status and then select Enabled.

Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Select the port or trunk. To add an IP port, type the port

number in the IP Port box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, then

click Apply To delete an IP port setting, select the entry in the Current IP Port Table,

then click Remove IP Port.

3-107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

CLI – The following example shows IP Port 80 mapped to CoS value 0 for ethernet

port 1.

Console(config)#map ip port

4-155

4-157

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console# show map ip port ethernet 1/5

TCP port mapping status: enabled

Port

Port no. COS

--------- -------- ---

Eth 1/ 5

1020

Console#

Copy Priority Settings

In the Copy Settings page you can copy the priority settings from a selected port or

trunk to another selected port or trunk.

Command Attributes

• Source Interface – The port or trunk from which the priority settings are copied.

• Destination Interface – The port or trunk to which the priority settings are

copied.

Web – Click Priority, Copy Settings. Check the type of priority settings to be copied,

select the source interface and destination interface, then click Copy Settings.

3-108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering

Multicasting is used to support real-time applications such

as videoconferencing or streaming audio. A multicast

server does not have to establish a separate connection

with each client. It merely broadcasts its service to the

network, and any hosts that want to receive the multicast

this approach reduces the network overhead required by

a multicast server, the broadcast traffic must be carefully

pruned at every multicast switch/router it passes through

to ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts which

subscribed to this service.

Unicast

Flow

Multicast

Flow

This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management

Protocol) to query for any attached hosts that want to

receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports

containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends

data out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any

neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the

multicast service. This procedure is called multicast filtering.

The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s

performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing

multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all

ports in the subnet (VLAN).

Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)

IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches

in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query (page 3-110) to monitor

IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers, and

dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.

Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier,

you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch)

connected over the network to an interface on your switch (page 3-112). This

interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached

router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces

within the switch.

Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control

more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on

the switch (page 3-114).

3-109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters

You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Based on the

IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that

request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all

ports and possibly disrupting network performance.

Command Usage

• IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report

packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host

groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP

packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and

configures the multicast filters accordingly.

• IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their

hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/

switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected

“querier” and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then

propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to

ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such

as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

Command Attributes

• IGMP Status – When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to

determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to

as IGMP Snooping. (Default: Enabled)

• Act as IGMP Querier – When enabled, the switch can serve as the Querier,

which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.

(Default: Enabled)

• IGMP Query Count – Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which

there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from

the multicast group. (Range: 2-10, Default: 2)

• IGMP Query Interval – Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP

host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds, Default: 125)

• IGMP Report Delay – Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an

IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of

that port and removes the entry from its list. (Range: 5-30 seconds, Default: 10)

•

IGMP Query Timeout – The time the switch waits after the previous querier

stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been

receiving query packets) to have expired.

(Range: 300-500 seconds, Default: 300)

• IGMP Version – Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices

on the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)

Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.

2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including IGMP Report Delay

and IGMP Query Timeout.

3-110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as

required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)

CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the

current status.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-time-out 300

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping

4-160

Service status

Querier status

Query count

: Enabled

: 10

Query interval

: 100 sec

Query max response time : 20 sec

Router port expire time: 300 sec

IGMP snooping version

Console#

: Version 2

Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router

Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained

from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to

support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically

discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.

You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this

switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch

or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.

3-111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required

VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.

CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port

attached to a multicast router.

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

---- ------------------ -------

Eth 1/1 Static

Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router

Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to

locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/

switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you

can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current

multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast

traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the

attached multicast router.

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.

3-112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration. Specify the

interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the

corresponding multicast traffic, and then click Add. After you have finished adding

interfaces to the list, click Apply.

CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

4-166

---- ------------------ -------

Eth 1/1 Static

Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services

You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast

service.

Command Attribute

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.

• Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.

• Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been

assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.

3-113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a VLAN ID and

the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will

display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.

CLI – The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for

VLAN 1:

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

4-161

---- --------------- ------------ -------

224.1.2.3

Eth1/1

IGMP

Console#

Assigning Ports to Multicast Services

Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP

Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query

Parameters” on page 3-110. For certain applications that require tighter control, you

may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the

ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the

multicast service to that VLAN group.

Command Usage

• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.

• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the

corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.

Command Attribute

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the

attached multicast router/switch.

• Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/switch.

3-114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface

attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router),

indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP

address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,

click Apply.

CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the

known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12 ethernet 1/12

Console(config)#exit

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

4-159

---- --------------- ------------ -------

224.1.1.12

224.1.2.3

Eth1/12

USER

IGMP

Console#

3-115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring the Switch

3-116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4: Command Line Interface

This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Using the Command Line Interface

Accessing the CLI

When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection

to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed

by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's

command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX

system.

Console Connection

To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:

1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user

names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and

“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI

displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode

(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,

the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode

(i.e., Normal Exec).

2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:

User Access Verification

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the switch is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Telnet Connection

Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your

management station and any network device you want to manage over the network

must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,

separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion.

For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, consists of a network

portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for

the switch, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a

different IP subnet. For example,

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254

If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to

the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are

attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the

network segment to which you are attached.

After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by

performing these steps:

1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the

device you want to access.

2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display

the “Vty-0#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged

access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-0>” for the guest to show that you

are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec).

3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the switch is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Vty-0#

Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.

4-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering Commands

This section describes how to enter CLI commands.

Keywords and Arguments

A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a

command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the

command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are

keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5

specifies the unit/port.

You can enter commands as follows:

• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.

• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For

example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup

configuration, enter:

Console>enable

Console#show startup-config

• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters

after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the

administrator, enter:

Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith

Minimum Abbreviation

The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a

command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an

entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.

Command Completion

If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a

partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example, typing

log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”

Getting Help on Commands

You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help

command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list

keywords or parameters.

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Showing Commands

If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of

keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or Privileged Exec) or

configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line, VLAN Database, or MSTP). You

can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the

command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:

Console#show ?

bridge-ext

calendar

controllers

dot1x

Bridge extend information

Date information

Interface controller status

Show 802.1x content

history

interfaces

Information of history

Information of interfaces

IP information

line

log

logging

TTY line information

Show the records of login

Show the setting of login

mac-address-table Set configuration of the address table

map

Map priority

port

pvlan

queue

radius-server

running-config

snmp

Characteristics of the port

Information of private VLAN

Information of priority queue

Radius server information

The system configuration of running

SNMP statistics

spanning-tree

ssh

Specify spanning-tree

Secure shell

startup-config

system

The system configuration of starting up

Information of system

tacacs-server

users

version

Display information about terminal lines

System hardware and software status

Switch VLAN Virtual Interface

vlan

Console#show

The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:

Console#show interfaces ?

counters

status

switchport

Information of interfaces counter

Information of interfaces status

Information of interfaces switchport

Console#

Partial Keyword Lookup

If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the

initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command

and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”

Console#show s?

snmp

sntp

spanning-tree

ssh

startup-config

system

4-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering Commands

Negating the Effect of Commands

For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel

the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example,

the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable

logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect

for all applicable commands.

Using Command History

The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll

back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command

displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then

executed.

Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed

commands.

Understanding Command Modes

The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands

generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.

Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable

certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.

Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a

question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the

current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the

following table:

Class

Exec

Mode

Normal

Privileged

Configuration

Interface

Global

Line

VLAN Database

You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.

You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.

Exec Commands

When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and

password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest

mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the

commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the

Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec

mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.”

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

The system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter

Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable

command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page 4-25).

To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:

Username: admin

Password: [admin login password]

CLI session with the switch is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Username: guest

Password: [guest login password]

CLI session with the switch is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Configuration Commands

Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch

settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved

when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile

storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.

The configuration commands are organized into different modes:

• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,

and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.

• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such

as speed-duplex and negotiation.

• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet

configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.

• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.

To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged

Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which gives you

access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.

Console#configure

Console(config)#

4-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering Commands

To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following

commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.

Mode

Line

Command

line {console | vty}

Prompt

Page

4-9

Console(config-line)#

Interface

VLAN

interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id} Console(config-if)#

vlan database Console(config-vlan)

4-91

For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration

mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#

Command Line Processing

Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters

as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently

available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial

commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list

of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for

command-line processing:

Keystroke

Function

Shifts cursor to start of command line.

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-B

Ctrl-C

Ctrl-E

Ctrl-F

Ctrl-K

Ctrl-L

Ctrl-N

Ctrl-P

Ctrl-R

Ctrl-U

Ctrl-W

Esc-B

Esc-D

Esc-F

Shifts cursor to the left one character.

Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.

Shifts cursor to end of command line.

Shifts cursor to the right one character.

Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Enters the next command line in the history buffer.

Enters the last command.

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Deletes the last word typed.

Moves the cursor back one word.

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.

Moves the cursor forward one word.

Delete key or backspace key

Erases a mistake when entering a command.

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Groups

The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.

Command Group

Line

Description

Page

Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet,

including baud rate and console time-out

4-9

General

Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the

system, or quitting the CLI

4-17

4-22

System Management

Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser

management options, and a variety of other system information

Flash/File

Manages code image or switch configuration files

4-60

Authentication

Configures logon access using local or remote authentication;

also configures port security and IEEE 802.1x port access control

SNMP

Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access

strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering

4-76

DHCP

Configures DHCP client

4-82

4-91

Interface

Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports,

aggregated links, and VLANs

Mirror Port

Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data

passing through or the performance of the monitored port

4-95

Rate Limiting

Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port

4-97

4-98

Link Aggregation

Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures

Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks

VDSL

Used to to configure and display communication parameters for VDSL 4-101

and ethernet ports on the switch and connected CPEs

Address Table

Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays 4-122

current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time

Spanning Tree

VLANs

Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch

4-125

Event Logging Commands (4-35)

Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN

groups; also enables or configures private VLANs

Bridge Extension

Priority

Display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB and 4-146

configure forbidden VLANs

Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted 4-147

round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority

for TCP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP

Multicast Filtering

IP Interface

Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, and specifies

ports attached to a multicast router

4-158

Configures IP address for the switch

4-166

The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:

NE (Normal Exec)

LC (Line Configuration)

PE (Privileged Exec)

GC (Global Configuration)

VC (VLAN Database Configuration)

IC (Interface Configuration)

4-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Commands

You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100

compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set

communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).

Command

line

Function

Mode Page

Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line

configuration mode

4-9

Enables password checking at login

Specifies a password on a line

4-10

4-11

4-12

password

exec-timeout

Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user

input is detected

password-thresh

silent-time*

Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of LC

failed logon attempts

4-12

4-13

Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC

after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the

threshold set by the password-thresh command

databits*

Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted

and generated by hardware

4-14

parity*

Defines the generation of a parity bit

Sets the terminal baud rate

speed*

stopbits*

disconnect

show line

Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte

Terminates a line connection

Displays a terminal line's parameters

NE, PE

* These commands only apply to the serial port.

line

This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent

line configuration commands.

Syntax

line {console | vty}

•

console - Console terminal line.

vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

There is no default line.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “Vty” in

screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication

parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.

Example

To enter console line mode, enter the following command:

Console(config)#line console

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

show line (4-17)

show users (4-53)

This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable

password checking and allow connections without a password.

Syntax

no login

local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the

user name specified with the username command.

Default Setting

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:

• login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the

password line configuration command. When using this method, the

management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

• login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by

the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this method, the

management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged Exec (PE)

mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15 respectively).

• no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the management

interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure

user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use the

RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.

4-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Commands

Example

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

username (4-24)

password (4-11)

password

This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the

password.

Syntax

password {0 | 7} password

no password

•

{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password

password - Character string that specifies the line password.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

No password is specified.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system

prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows

a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the number of

times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the

line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password

settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during

system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.

There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (4-12)

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

exec-timeout

This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

exec-timeout [seconds]

no exec-timeout

seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.

(Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)

Default Setting

CLI: No timeout

Telnet: 10 minutes

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;

otherwise the session is terminated.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.

Example

To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120

Console(config-line)#

password-thresh

This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of

failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.

Syntax

password-thresh threshold

no password-thresh

threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.

(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)

Default Setting

The default value is three attempts.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

4-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Commands

Command Usage

• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes

silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt. (Use

the silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is reached

for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

Example

To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

silent-time (4-13)

silent-time

This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible

after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the

password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.

Syntax

silent-time [seconds]

no silent-time

seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.

(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)

Default Setting

The default value is no silent-time.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Example

To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (4-12)

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

databits

This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and

generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax

databits {7 | 8}

no databits

•

7 - Seven data bits per character.

8 - Eight data bits per character.

Default Setting

8 data bits per character

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices

that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data

bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character.

Example

To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#databits 7

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

parity (4-14)

parity

This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the

default setting.

Syntax

parity {none | even | odd}

no parity

•

none - No parity

even - Even parity

odd - Odd parity

Default Setting

No parity

4-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Commands

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems

often require a specific parity bit setting.

Example

To specify no parity, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#parity none

Console(config-line)#

speed

This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the

transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore

the default setting.

Syntax

speed bps

no speed

bps - Baud rate in bits per second.

(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps, or auto)

Default Setting

auto

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial

port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be

supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported. If

you select the “auto” option, the switch will automatically detect the baud rate

configured on the attached terminal, and adjust the speed accordingly.

Example

To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#speed 57600

Console(config-line)#

4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

stopbits

This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no

form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

stopbits {1 | 2}

•

1 - One stop bit

2 - Two stop bits

Default Setting

1 stop bit

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Example

To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#stopbits 2

Console(config-line)#

disconnect

Use this command to terminate an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.

Syntax

disconnect session-id

session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console

connection. (Range: 0-4)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection.

Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or

Telnet connection.

Example

Console#disconnect 1

Console#

Related Commands

show users (4-53)

4-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Commands

show line

This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.

Syntax

show line [console | vty]

•

console - Console terminal line.

vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

Shows all lines

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

To show all lines, enter this command:

Console#show line

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: Disabled

Baudrate: 9600

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

Vty configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 65535

General Commands

Command

enable

Function

Mode Page

Activates privileged mode

disable

configure

show history

reload

Returns to normal mode from privileged mode

Activates global configuration mode

Shows the command history buffer

Restarts the system

NE, PE

end

Returns to Privileged Exec mode

any

config.

mode

exit

quit

help

Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI

Exits a CLI session

any

4-21

NE, PE

any

Shows how to use help

Shows options for command completion (context sensitive)

any

4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

enable

This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional

commands are available, and certain commands display additional information. See

“Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.

Syntax

enable level

level - Privilege level to log into the device.

The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,

15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

Level 15

Command Mode

Normal Exec

Command Usage

• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from

Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable

password command on page 4-25.)

The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the

system is in privileged access mode.

Example

Console>enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Related Commands

disable (4-18)

enable password (4-25)

disable

This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal

access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or

Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged

mode. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Commands

Command Usage

The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the

system is in normal access mode.

Example

Console#disable

Console>

Related Commands

enable (4-18)

configure

This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to

modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode

prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface

Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN Database Configuration, and Multiple

Spanning Tree Configuration. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#configure

Console(config)#

Related Commands

end (4-21)

show history

This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and

10 Configuration commands.

4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command

history buffer:

Console#show history

Execution command history:

2 config

1 show history

Configuration command history:

4 interface vlan 1

3 exit

2 interface vlan 1

1 end

Console#

The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer

when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the

Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration

modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the

Execution history buffer (config).

Console#!2

Console#config

Console(config)#

reload

This command restarts the system.

Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also

retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy

running-config startup-config command.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command resets the entire system.

Example

This example shows how to reset the switch:

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

4-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Commands

end

This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN

Database Configuration, and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration.

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface

Configuration mode:

Console(config-if)#end

Console#

exit

This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration

program.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Any

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global

Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:

Console(config)#exit

Console#exit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

quit

This command exits the configuration program.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.

Example

This example shows how to quit a CLI session:

Console#quit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

System Management Commands

These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser

configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.

Command Group

Function

Pag

Device Designation

User Access

IP Filter

Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch

Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access

Enables management access via a Web browser

Provides secure replacement for Telnet

Web Server

Secure Shell

Event Logging

SMTP Alerts

Controls logging of error messages

Configures SMTP email alerts

Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually

System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information

Device Designation Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

prompt

Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode

Specifies the host name for the switch

Sets the system contact string

4-23

4-77

hostname

snmp-server contact

snmp-server location Sets the system location string

4-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

prompt

This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default

prompt.

Syntax

prompt string

no prompt

string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum

length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

Console

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#prompt RD2

RD2(config)#

hostname

This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form

to restore the default host name.

Syntax

hostname name

no hostname

name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#hostname RD#1

Console(config)#

4-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

User Access Commands

The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section.

This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a

Telnet connection (page 4-9), user authentication via a remote authentication server

(page 4-60), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 4-68).

Command

Function

Mode Pag

username

Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login GC

Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC

4-24

4-25

enable password

username

This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or

changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or

changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.

Syntax

username name {access-level level | nopassword |

password {0 | 7} password}

no username name

•

name - The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)

access-level level - Specifies the user level.

The device has two predefined privilege levels:

•

0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.

•

nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.

{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

password password - The authentication password for the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

•

The default access level is Normal Exec.

The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:

username access-level password

guest

admin

guest

admin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password

settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file

during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP

server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

4-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Example

This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user.

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

enable password

After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.

Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the

Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the

default password.

Syntax

enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password

no enable password [level level]

•

level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)

{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

password - password for this privilege level.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

•

The default is level 15.

The default password is “super”

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change

the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable

command (page 4-18).

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password

settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during

system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.

There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin

Console(config)#

Related Commands

enable (4-18)

4-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

IP Filter Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

management

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC

4-26

4-27

show management

Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a

browser

management

This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management

access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the

default setting.

Syntax

[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}

start-address [end-address]

•

all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, Web and Telnet groups.

http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Web group.

snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.

end-address - The end address of a range.

Default Setting

All addresses

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid

address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the

system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.

• IP address can be configured for SNMP, Web and Telnet access respectively.

Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either

individual addresses or address ranges.

• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, Web or Telnet), the

switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for

different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.

• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must

delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.

• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by

specifying both the start address and end address.

4-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Example

This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console#

show management

This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management

access to the switch through various protocols.

Syntax

show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}

•

all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, Web and Telnet groups.

http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Web group.

snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console#show management all-client

Management Ip Filter

Http-Client:

Start ip address

End ip address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25

192.168.1.19

192.168.1.30

Snmp-Client:

Start ip address

End ip address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25

192.168.1.19

192.168.1.30

Telnet-Client:

Start ip address

End ip address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25

192.168.1.19

192.168.1.30

Console#

4-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Web Server Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

ip http port

Specifies the port to be used by the Web browser interface

4-28

4-29

4-30

ip http server

Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC

ip http secure-server

ip http secure-port

ip telnet server

Enables HTTPS/SSL for encrypted communications

Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS/SSL

Enables Telnet access to the switch

ip http port

This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Web browser interface.

Use the no form to use the default port.

Syntax

ip http port port-number

no ip http port

port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip http port 769

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http server (4-28)

ip http server

This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use

the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip http server

Default Setting

Enabled

4-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip http server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http port (4-28)

ip http secure-server

This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the

Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)

to the switch’s Web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip http secure-server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.

However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same

UDP port.

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your

browser: https://device[:port_number]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

• The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

• The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the

connection.

• The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

• A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x and

Netscape Navigator 4.x or later versions.

• The following Web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:

Web Browser

Operating System

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),

Windows 2000, Windows XP

Netscape Navigator 4.76 or later

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),

Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6

• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site

Certificate” on page 3-29. Also refer to the copy command on page 4-55.

4-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-port (4-30)

copy tftp https-certificate (4-55)

ip http secure-port

This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to

the switch’s Web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.

Syntax

ip http secure-port port_number

no ip http secure-port

port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

443

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.

• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the

HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:

https://device:port_number

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-server (4-29)

ip telnet server

Use this command to enable the device to be configured, or monitored, by Telnet.

Use the no form of this command to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip telnet server

4-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console#config

Console(config)#ip telnet server

Console(config-line)#

Secure Shell Commands

The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix

systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows

and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rsh (remote

shell), and rexec (remote execute), are not secure from hostile attacks.

The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure

replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH provides remote

management access via encrypted paths between the switch and SSH-enabled

management station clients. The commands described in this section show how to

configure the SSH server. However, you also need to install a SSH client on the

management station when using this protocol to configure the switch. When the

client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a public-key

that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access

authentication.

Note: The switch supports only SSH Version 1.5.

Command

ip ssh server

Function

Mode Pag

Enables the SSH server on the switch

4-31

ip ssh timeout

Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server

Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client

ip ssh

authentication-retries

disconnect ssh

show ip ssh

Terminates an SSH connection

4-34

Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE

for authentication timeout and retries

show ssh

Displays the status of current SSH sessions

Event Logging Commands (4-35)

4-53

show users

Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type PE

ip ssh server

Use this command to enable the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the

no form to disable this service.

Syntax

[no] ip ssh server

4-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of

client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.

• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first

establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to

select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.

• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa

Console#configure

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip ssh timeout

Use this command to configure the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to

restore the default setting.

Syntax

ip ssh timeout seconds

no ip ssh timeout

seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.

(Range: 1-120)

Default Setting

10 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the

client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been

established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout

command for vty sessions.

4-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60

Console(config)#

Related Commands

exec-timeout (4-12)

show ip ssh (4-34)

ip ssh authentication-retries

Use this command to configure the number of times the SSH server attempts to

reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

ip ssh authentication-retries count

no ip ssh authentication-retries

count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the

interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show ip ssh (4-34)

disconnect ssh

Use this command to terminate a Secure Shell (SSH) client connection.

Syntax

disconnect ssh connection-id

connection-id – The session identifier as displayed in the show ssh

command.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#disconnect ssh 0

Console#

show ip ssh

Use this command to display the connection settings used when authenticating

client access to the SSH server.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip ssh

Information of secure shell

SSH status: enable

SSH authentication timeout: 120

SSH authentication retries: 3

Console#

show ssh

Use this command to display the current SSH server connections.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ssh

Information of secure shell

Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state

------- -------- ------- -------------- -----------------

admin

1.5

cipher-3des

session-started

Console#

Field

Description

Session

Username

Version

The session number. (Range: 0-3)

The user name of the client.

The Secure Shell version number.

Negotiation State

The authentication negotiation state.

(Values: negotiation-started, authentication-started, session-started)

Encryption Method

The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.

Options for SSHv1.5 include: des, 3des

Terminology:

des – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)

3des – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)

4-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Event Logging Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

logging on

Controls logging of error messages

show logging sendmail (4-43)

4-36

logging history

logging host

Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on

severity

Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC

messages

4-37

logging facility

logging trap

Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages

4-37

4-38

Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on

severity

clear logging

show logging

Clears messages from the logging buffer

Displays the state of logging

4-38

4-39

logging on

This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error

messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.

Syntax

[no] logging on

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory. You

can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages

that are stored.

Example

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#

Related Commands

logging history (4-36)

clear logging (4-38)

4-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

logging history

This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.

The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.

Syntax

logging history {flash | ram} level

no logging history {flash | ram}

•

flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on

power reset).

•

level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the

selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)

Level Argument Level

Description

Debugging messages

debugging

informational

notifications

warnings

errors

Informational messages only

Normal but significant condition, such as cold start

Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)

Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)

critical

Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free

memory error - resource exhausted)

alerts

Immediate action needed

System unusable

emergencies

Note: There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

Default Setting

Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)

RAM: warnings (level 7 - 0)

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority

(i.e., numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.

Example

Console(config)#logging history ram 0

Console(config)#

4-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

logging host

This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging

messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.

Syntax

[no] logging host host_ip_address

host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP

addresses.

• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.

Example

Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3

Console(config)#

logging facility

This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the

no form to return the type to the default.

Syntax

[no] logging facility type

type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to

dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages.

(See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by

the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or

to store messages in the corresponding database.

4-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#logging facility 19

Console(config)#

logging trap

This command limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity.

Use the no form to return the remote logging of syslog messages to the default

level.

Syntax

[no] logging trap level

level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the

selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on page 4-36.)

Default Setting

Level 3 - 0

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#logging trap 4

Console(config)#

clear logging

This command clears messages from the log buffer.

Syntax

clear logging [flash | ram]

•

flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on

power reset).

Default Setting

Flash and RAM

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear logging

Console#

Related Commands

show logging (4-39)

4-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

show logging

This command displays the logging configuration, along with any system and event

messages stored in memory.

Syntax

show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}

•

flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on

power reset).

•

sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 4-43).

trap - Displays settings for the trap function.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for

flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is

“debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0), and lists one sample error

Console#show logging flash

Syslog logging: Enable

History logging in FLASH: level errors

[0] 0:0:5 1/1/1 "PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails."

level: 3, module: 13, function: 0, and event no.: 0

Console#show logging ram

Syslog logging: Enable

History logging in RAM: level debugging

[0] 0:0:5 1/1/1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails."

level: 3, module: 13, function: 0, and event no.: 0

Console#

Field

Description

Syslog logging

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.

History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.

Messages

Any system and event messages stored in memory.

4-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

The following example displays settings for the trap function.

Console#show logging trap

Syslog logging: Enable

REMOTELOG status: disable

REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7

REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages

REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4

REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0

Console#

Field

Syslog logging

Description

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.

REMOTELOG status

REMOTELOG

facility type

The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging

facility command.

REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in

the logging trap command.

REMOTELOG

server IP address

The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.

Related Commands

SMTP Alert Commands

Configures SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert messages to the specified

SMTP servers and email recipients.

Command

logging sendmail host

logging sendmail level

Function

Mode Page

SMTP servers to receive alert messages

4-41

4-42

Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages

Email address used for “From” field of alert messages

logging sendmail

source-email

logging sendmail

destination-email

Email recipients of alert messages

4-42

logging sendmail

Enables SMTP event handling

4-43

show logging sendmail

Displays SMTP event handler settings

NE, PE

4-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

logging sendmail host

This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no

form to remove an SMTP server.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail host ip_address

ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert

messages for event handling.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you

must enter a separate command to specify each server.

• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email

alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.

• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent

mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.

If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to

send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic

interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a

connection.)

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#

logging sendmail level

This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.

Syntax

logging sendmail level [level]

level - One of the system message levels (page 4-36). Messages sent

include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)

Default Setting

Level 7

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or

higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using

Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)

Example

This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.

Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3

Console(config)#

logging sendmail source-email

This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.

Syntax

logging sendmail source-email email-address

email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 1-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the

address of an administrator responsible for the switch.

Example

This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.

Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email bill@this-company.com

Console(config)#

logging sendmail destination-email

This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to

remove a recipient.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address

email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 1-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

4-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must

enter a separate command to specify each recipient.

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com

Console(config)#

logging sendmail

This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this

function.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail

Console(config)#

show logging sendmail

This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#show logging sendmail

SMTP servers

-----------------------------------------------

192.168.1.19

SMTP minimum severity level: 7

SMTP destination email addresses

-----------------------------------------------

ted@this-company.com

SMTP source email address: bill@this-company.com

SMTP status: Enable

Console#

Time Commands

The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers

(NTP or SNTP), or by using information broadcast by local time servers.

Command

sntp client

Function

Mode Pag

Accepts time from specified time servers

Specifies one or more time servers

sntp server

sntp poll

Sets the interval at which the client polls for time

sntp broadcast client Accepts time from any time broadcast server

show sntp

Shows current SNTP configuration settings

Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock

Sets the system date and time

NE, PE

clock timezone

calendar set

show calendar

Displays the current date and time setting

NE, PE

sntp client

This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or

SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to

disable SNTP client requests.

Syntax

[no] sntp client

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Command Usage

• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times

for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting from the

factory default set at the last bootup

(e.g., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).

• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the

sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the

interval set via the sntp poll command.

• The SNTP time query method is set to client mode when the first sntp client

command is issued. However, if the sntp broadcast client command is issued,

then the no sntp broadcast client command must be used to return the switch

to SNTP client mode.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#end

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002

Poll interval: 60

Current mode: unicast

Console#

Related Commands

sntp server (4-45)

sntp poll (4-46)

sntp broadcast client (4-47)

show sntp (4-47)

sntp server

This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are

issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the

current list.

Syntax

sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]

ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP).

(Range: 1 - 3 addresses)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time

updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in

the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization

requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console#

Related Commands

sntp client (4-44)

sntp poll (4-46)

show sntp (4-47)

sntp poll

This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is

set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.

Syntax

sntp poll seconds

no sntp poll

seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)

Default Setting

16 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode.

Example

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console#

Related Commands

sntp client (4-44)

4-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

sntp broadcast client

This command synchronizes the switch’s clock based on time broadcast from time

servers (using the multicast address 224.0.1.1). Use the no form to disable SNTP

broadcast client mode.

Syntax

[no] sntp broadcast client

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#sntp broadcast client

Console#

show sntp

This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP

client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending

time synchronization requests (when the switch is set to SNTP client mode),

and the current SNTP mode (i.e., client or broadcast).

Example

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002

Poll interval: 16

Current mode: unicast

Console#

4-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

clock timezone

This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.

Syntax

clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc | after-utc}

•

name - Name of time zone, usually an acronym.

(Range: 1-29 characters)

•

hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 1-12 hours)

minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC.

(Range: 0-59 minutes)

•

before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.

after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s

prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to

your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time

zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.

Example

Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show sntp (4-47)

calendar set

This command sets the system clock.

Syntax

calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}

•

hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0 - 23)

min - Minute. (Range: 0 - 59)

sec - Second. (Range: 0 - 59)

day - Day of month. (Range: 1 - 31)

september | october | november | december

year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001 - 2101)

•

4-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, February 1st, 2002.

Console#calendar set 15:12:34 1 February 2002

Console#

show calendar

This command displays the system clock.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show calendar set

15:12:34 February 1 2002

Console#

System Status Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

show startup-config

Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in flash

memory) that is used to start up the system

4-49

show running-config

show system

Displays the configuration data currently in use

Displays system information

4-51

4-53

NE, PE

show users

Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user

name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients

show version

Displays version information for the system

NE, PE

4-54

show startup-config

This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is

used to start up the system.

Default Setting

None

4-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to

compare the information in running memory to the information stored in

non-volatile memory.

• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is

separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and

corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:

• SNMP community strings

• Users (names and access levels)

• VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

• VLAN configuration settings for each interface

• Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)

• IP address configured for VLANs

• Routing protocol configuration settings

• Spanning tree settings

• Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

4-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Example

Console#show startup-config

building startup-config, please wait.....

username admin access-level 15

username admin password 0 admin

username guest access-level 0

username guest password 0 guest

enable password level 15 0 super

snmp-server community public ro

snmp-server community private rw

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

spanning-tree mst-configuration

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

switchport native vlan 1

lacp partner admin-key 0

spanning-tree edge-port

interface vlan 1

ip address dhcp

line console

line vty

end

Console#

Related Commands

show running-config (4-51)

show running-config

This command displays the configuration information currently in use.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to

compare the information in running memory to the information stored in

non-volatile memory.

• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is

separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and

corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:

• SNMP community strings

• Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)

• VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

• VLAN configuration settings for each interface

• Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)

• IP address configured for VLANs

• Spanning tree settings

• Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

Example

Console#show running-config

building running-config, please wait.....

snmp-server community private rw

snmp-server community public ro

username admin access-level 15

username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3

username guest access-level 0

username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4

enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

switchport native vlan 1

queue cos-map 0 0 1 2

queue cos-map 1 3 4

queue cos-map 2 5 7

efm pbo

interface vlan 1

ip address 192.168.1.33 255.255.255.0

spanning-tree mode rstp

ip igmp snooping version 1

no map ip precedence

no map ip dscp

queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7

line console

line vty

end

Console#

4-52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Management Commands

Related Commands

show startup-config (4-49)

show system

This command displays system information.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to “Displaying

System Information” on page 3-7.

• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates “FAIL,”

contact your distributor for assistance.

Example

Console#show system

System description: 20 10/100/1000 ports + 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2/L4

managed standalone switch

System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.51

System information

System Up time: 0 days, 1 hours, 23 minutes, and 44.61 seconds

System Name

: [NONE]

System Location

System Contact

MAC address

: [NONE]

: 00-30-f1-47-58-3a

: enable

Web server

Web server port

Web secure server

: 80

: enable

Web secure server port : 443

POST result

UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS

DRAM Test....................PASS

Timer Test...................PASS

PCI Device 1 Test............PASS

PCI Device 2 Test............PASS

Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS

Done All Pass.

Console#

show users

Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP

address of Telnet client.

Default Setting

None

4-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next

to the Line (i.e., session) index number.

Example

Console#show users

Username accounts:

Username Privilege Public-Key

-------- --------- ----------

admin

guest

None

Online users:

Line

Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.

----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------

* 0

console

vty 0

admin

0:00:00

0:04:37

10.1.0.19

Console#

show version

This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 3-9 for detailed

information on the items displayed by this command.

Example

Console#show version

Unit1

Serial number

:1111111111

:R0A

:24

Hardware version

Number of ports

Main power status

:up

Redundant power status :not present

Agent(master)

Unit id

Loader version

Boot rom version

:2.0.2.2

:2.0.2.3

Operation code version :1.0.0.0

Console#

4-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash/File Commands

These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.

Command Function Mode Page

copy

Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE

memory or a TFTP server

delete

Deletes a file or code image

4-57

4-58

4-59

dir

Displays a list of files in flash memory

Displays the files booted

whichboot

boot system

Specifies the file or image used to start up the system

copy

This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file

between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system

code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be

downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file

transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the

network connection.

Syntax

copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp}

copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}

copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}

copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate}

•

file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.

running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current

running configuration.

•

startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.

tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.

https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the

switch.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.

• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of

the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names

on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch.

(Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)

• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation

code files.

• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on available

memory.

• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the

factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.

• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the

destination.

• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP

server. You must use a direct console connection and access the download

menu during a boot up to download the Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image.

Example

The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on

the TFTP server:

Console#copy file tftp

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1

Source file name: startup

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Destination file name: startup.01

TFTP completed.

Success.

Console#

The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.

Console#copy running-config file

destination file name: startup

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

4-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash/File Commands

The following example shows how to download a configuration file:

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Source configuration file name: startup.01

Startup configuration file name [startup]:

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It

then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Source certificate file name: SS-certificate

Source private file name: SS-private

Private password: ********

Success.

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

delete

This command deletes a file or image.

Syntax

delete filename

filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.

• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.

Example

This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory.

Console#delete test2.cfg

Console#

Related Commands

dir (4-58)

4-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

dir

This command displays a list of files in flash memory.

Syntax

dir [boot-rom | config | opcode [:filename]]

The type of file or image to display includes:

•

boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.

config - Switch configuration file.

opcode - Run-time operation code image file.

filename - Name of the file or image. If this file exists but contains errors,

information on this file cannot be shown.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all

files.

• File information is shown below:

Column Heading

Description

file name

file type

startup

size

The name of the file.

File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.

Shows if this file is used when the system is started.

The length of the file in bytes.

Example

The following example shows how to display all file information:

Console#dir

file name

file type startup size (byte)

-------------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------

diag_0060 Boot-Rom image

run_01642 Operation Code

run_0200 Operation Code

111360

1074304

1083008

2574

Factory_Default_Config.cfg

startup

Config File

2710

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total free space:

Console#

4-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash/File Commands

whichboot

This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See

the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by

this command.

Console#whichboot

file name

file type startup size (byte)

----------------- -------------- ------- -----------

diag_0060 Boot-Rom image

run_0200 Operation Code

111360

1083008

2710

startup

Config File

Console#

boot system

This command specifies the image used to start up the system.

Syntax

boot system {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename

The type of file or image to set as a default includes:

•

boot-rom - Boot ROM.

config - Configuration file.

opcode - Run-time operation code.

The colon (:) is required.

filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

• Command Usage

• A colon (:) is required after the specified file type.

• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.

Example

Console(config)#boot system config: startup

Console(config)#

4-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Related Commands

dir (4-58)

whichboot (4-59)

Authentication Commands

You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for

management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods. You can also

enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1x.

Command Group

Authentication Sequence

RADIUS Client

Function

Page

Defines logon authentication method and precedence

Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server

Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server

Configures secure addresses for a port

TACACS+ Client

Port Security

Port Authentication

Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1x

Authentication Sequence

Command

Function

Defines logon authentication method and precedence

Mode Page

authentication login

4-60

authentication login

This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the no

form to restore the default.

Syntax

authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}

•

no authentication login

local - Use local password.

radius - Use RADIUS server password.

tacacs - Use TACACS server password.

Default Setting

Local

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

•

RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort

delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that

RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the

client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

4-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level

for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege

level must be configured on the authentication server.

• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate

the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login

radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is

verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is

attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the

local user name and password is checked.

Example

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#

Related Commands

username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-24)

RADIUS Client

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication

protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to

RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a

database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for

each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Command

radius-server host

Function

Specifies the RADIUS server

Mode Page

4-61

4-62

4-63

radius-server port

Sets the RADIUS server network port

Sets the RADIUS encryption key

Sets the number of retries

radius-server key

radius-server retransmit

radius-server timeout

Sets the interval between sending authentication

requests

show radius-server

Shows the current RADIUS settings

4-64

radius-server host

This command specifies the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server host host_ip_address

no radius-server host

host_ip_address - IP address of server.

Default Setting

10.1.0.1

4-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#

radius-server port

This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

radius-server port port_number

no radius-server port

port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

1812

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#

radius-server key

This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

radius-server key key_string

no radius-server key

key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do

not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Example

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#

radius-server retransmit

This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server retransmit number_of_retries

no radius-server retransmit

number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate

logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#

radius-server timeout

This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the

RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server timeout number_of_seconds

no radius-server timeout

number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply

before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console(config)#

4-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show radius-server

This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show radius-server

Server IP address: 10.1.0.1

Communication key with radius server:

Server port number: 1812

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Console#

TACACS+ Client

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon

authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control

access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server

contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege

levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Command

tacacs-server host

tacacs-server port

tacacs-server key

show tacacs-server

Function

Specifies the TACACS+ server

Mode Page

4-64

4-65

4-66

Specifies the TACACS+ server network port

Sets the TACACS+ encryption key

Shows the current TACACS+ settings

tacacs-server host

This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

tacacs-server host host_ip_address

no tacacs-server host

host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

10.11.12.13

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#

tacacs-server port

This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

tacacs-server port port_number

no tacacs-server port

port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication

messages. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181

Console(config)#

tacacs-server key

This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

tacacs-server key key_string

no tacacs-server key

key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the

client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.

(Maximum length: 20 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console(config)#

show tacacs-server

This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show tacacs-server

Remote TACACS server configuration:

Server IP address: 10.11.12.13

Communication key with radius server: green

Server port number: 49

Console#

Port Security Commands

These commands can be used to disable the learning function or manually specify

secure addresses for a port. You may want to leave port security off for an initial

training period (i.e., enable the learning function) to register all the current VLAN

members on the selected port, and then enable port security to ensure that the port

will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has

been previously learned from another port.

Command

port security

Function

Configures a secure port

Mode Page

4-67

4-122

mac-address-table static (4-122)

mac-address-table static

show mac-address-table

Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN

Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database

4-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

port security

This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any

keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to

restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum

number of allowed addresses.

Syntax

port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}

| max-mac-count address-count]

no port security [action | max-mac-count]

•

action - Response to take when port security is violated.

shutdown - Disable port only.

trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.

trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.

max-mac-count address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses

that can be learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 20)

Default Setting

Status: Disabled

Action: None

Maximum Addresses: 0

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• If you enable port security, the switch will stop dynamically learning new

addresses on the specified port. Only incoming traffic with source addresses

already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted.

• To use port security, first allow the switch to dynamically learn the <source MAC

address, VLAN> pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period,

and then enable port security to stop address learning. Be sure you enable the

learning function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been

registered on the selected port.

• To add new VLAN members at a later time, you can manually add secure

addresses with the mac-address-table static command, or turn off port

security to re-enable the learning function long enough for new VLAN members

to be registered. Learning may then be disabled again, if desired, for security.

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

• Cannot use port monitoring.

• Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.

• Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.

• Cannot be a trunk port.

• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled

using the no shutdown command.

4-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a

security violation to issue a trap message:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap

Related Commands

shutdown (4-89)

show mac-address-table (4-123)

802.1x Port Authentication

The switch supports IEEE 802.1x (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents

unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for

authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server

using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).

Command

Function

Mode Page

authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type

4-68

4-69

dot1x default

Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values

dot1x max-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch

retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client

before it times out the authentication session

dot1x port-control

Sets dot1x mode for a port interface

4-70

4-71

dot1x operation-mode

dot1x re-authenticate

dot1x re-authentication

dot1x timeout quiet-period

Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port

Forces re-authentication on specific ports

Enables re-authentication for all ports

Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max

Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to

acquire a new client

dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must GC

be re-authenticated

4-72

4-73

dot1x timeout tx-period

Sets the time period during an authentication session that GC

the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet

show dot1x

Shows all dot1x related information

authentication dot1x default

This command sets the default authentication server type. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

authentication dot1x default radius

no authentication dot1x

4-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Default Setting

RADIUS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#authentication dot1x default radius

Console(config)#

dot1x default

This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default

values.

Syntax

dot1x default

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x default

Console(config)#

dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an

EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication

session. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

dot1x max-req count

no dot1x max-req

count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)

Default

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x max-req 2

Console(config)#

4-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

dot1x port-control

This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore

the default.

Syntax

dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}

no dot1x port-control

•

auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the

RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either

dot1x-aware or otherwise.

force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,

either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

Default

force-authorized

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#

dot1x operation-mode

This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an

802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to

single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the

default maximum count.

Syntax

dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count]}

no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]

•

single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.

multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.

max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.

count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.

(Range: 1-20; Default: 5)

Default

Single-host

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

4-70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10

Console(config-if)#

dot1x re-authenticate

This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.

Syntax

dot1x re-authenticate interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#dot1x re-authenticate

Console#

dot1x re-authentication

This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports. Use the no

form to disable re-authentication.

Syntax

[no] dot1x re-authentication

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config)#

dot1x timeout quiet-period

This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count

has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to

reset the default.

Syntax

dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds

no dot1x timeout quiet-period

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

4-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default

60 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350

Console(config)#

dot1x timeout re-authperiod

This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be

re-authenticated.

Syntax

dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds

no dot1x timeout re-authperiod

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

3600 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300

Console(config)#

dot1x timeout tx-period

This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session

before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to reset to the default value.

Syntax

dot1x timeout tx-period seconds

no dot1x timeout tx-period

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

30 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Example

Console(config)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300

Console(config)#

show dot1x

This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a

specific interface.

Syntax

show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the following information:

• Global 802.1X Parameters – Displays the global port access control parameters

that can be configured for this switch as described in the preceding pages,

including reauth-enabled (page 4-71), reauth-period (page 4-72), quiet-period

(page 4-71), tx-period (page 4-72), and max-req (page 4-69). It also displays

the following global parameters which are set to a fixed value, including the

following items:

- supp-timeout– Supplicant timeout.

- server-timeout– Server timeout.

- reauth-max– Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.

• 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for each

interface, including the following items:

- Status– Administrative state for port access control.

- Mode– Dot1x port control mode (page 4-70).

- Authorized– Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).

• 802.1X Port Details – Displays detailed port access control settings for each

interface as described in the preceding pages, including administrative status

for port access control, Max request (page 4-69), Quiet period (page 4-71),

Reauth period (page 4-72), Tx period (page 4-72), and Port-control

(page 4-70). It also displays the following information:

- Status– Authorization status (authorized or unauthorized).

- Supplicant– MAC address of authorized client.

4-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

• Authenticator State Machine

- State– Current state (including initialize, disconnected, connecting,

authenticating, authenticated, aborting, held, force_authorized,

force_unauthorized).

- Reauth Count– Number of times connecting state is re-entered.

• Backend State Machine

- State – Current state (including request, response, success, fail, timeout,

idle, initialize).

- Request Count– Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant

without receiving a response.

- Identifier(Server)– Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success, Failure

or Request packet received from the Authentication Server.

• Reauthentication State Machine

State

– Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).

4-74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Authentication Commands

Example

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

reauth-enabled: yes

reauth-period: 300

quiet-period:

tx-period:

supp-timeout:

350

300

server-timeout: 30

reauth-max:

max-req:

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name

Status

Mode

Authorized

disabled

ForceAuthorized

n/a

disabled

enabled

ForceAuthorized

Auto

yes

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1

802.1X is enabled on port 26

Max request

Quiet period

Reauth period

Tx period

350

300

Status

Port-control

Supplicant

Unauthorized

Auto

00-00-00-00-00-00

Authenticator State Machine

State

Connecting

Reauth Count

Backend State Machine

State

Idle

Request Count

Identifier(Server) 0

Reauthentication State Machine

State

Initialize

Console#

4-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

SNMP Commands

SNMP Commands control access to this switch from management stations using

the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent

to trap managers.

Command

Function

Mode Page

snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to

SNMP commands

4-76

snmp-server contact

snmp-server location

snmp-server host

Sets the system contact string

4-77

4-78

4-79

Sets the system location string

Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation

snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP

notifications)

snmp ip filter

Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access to GC

the switch via SNMP

4-80

4-81

show snmp

Displays the status of SNMP communications

NE, PE

snmp-server community

This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network

Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string.

Syntax

snmp-server community string [ro|rw]

no snmp-server community string

•

string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to

the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;

Maximum number of strings: 5)

•

ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only

able to retrieve MIB objects.

rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able

to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Default Setting

• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to

retrieve MIB objects.

• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both

retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The first snmp-server community command you enter enables SNMP

(SNMPv1). The no snmp-server community command disables SNMP.

4-76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SNMP Commands

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw

Console(config)#

snmp-server contact

This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the

system contact information.

Syntax

snmp-server contact string

no snmp-server contact

string - String that describes the system contact information.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server location (4-77)

snmp-server location

This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the

location string.

Syntax

snmp-server location text

no snmp-server location

text - String that describes the system location.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server contact (4-77)

snmp-server host

This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol

notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.

Syntax

snmp-server host host-addr community-string [version {1 | 2c}]

no snmp-server host host-addr

•

host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).

(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)

community-string - Password-like community string sent with the

notification operation. Although you can set this string using the

snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define this

string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the

snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 32 characters)

version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps.

•

Default Setting

Host Address: None

SNMP Version: 1

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.

In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at

least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you

must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.

• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server

enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps command to

specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive

notifications, at least one snmp-server enable traps command and the

snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.

• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable

traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.

• The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP

address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station

supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP version,

the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.

4-78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SNMP Commands

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server enable traps (4-79)

snmp-server enable traps

This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol

traps (SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.

Syntax

[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]

•

authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure traps.

link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down traps.

The link-up-down trap can only be enabled/disabled via the CLI.

Default Setting

Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications

controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send

SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps

command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication and

link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a

keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.

• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the

snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify

which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send notifications,

you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server host (4-78)

4-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

snmp ip filter

This command sets the IP addresses of clients that are allowed management

access to the switch via SNMP. Use the no form the remove an IP address.

Syntax

[no] snmp ip filter ip_address subnet_mask

•

ip_address - An IP address indicating a client or group of clients that are

allowed SNMP access to the switch.

subnet_mask - An address bitmask of decimal numbers that represent the

address bits to match.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are

allowed access to the switch via SNMP management software.

• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four decimal integers

from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses “1” bits to

indicate “match” and “0” bits to indicate “ignore.”

• If the IP is the address of a single management station, the bitmask should be

set to 255.255.255.255. Otherwise, an IP address group is specified by the

bitmask.

• The default setting is null, which allows all IP groups SNMP access to the

switch. If one IP address is configured, IP filtering is enabled and only

addresses in the specified IP group will have SNMP access.

• IP filtering does not affect management access to the switch using the Web

interface or Telnet.

Example

The following example enables SNMP IP filtering on the switch and allows SNMP

management access to client IP 10.1.2.3, and client IP group 10.1.3.0 to 10.1.3.255.

Console(config)#snmp ip filter 10.1.2.3 255.255.255.255

Console(config)#snmp ip filter 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show snmp (4-81)

4-80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SNMP Commands

show snmp

This command checks the status of SNMP communications.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command provides information on the community access strings, counter

information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not

SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps

command.

Example

Console#show snmp

SNMP traps:

Authentication: enable

Link-up-down: enable

SNMP communities:

1. private, and the privilege is read-write

2. public, and the privilege is read-only

0 SNMP packets input

0 Bad SNMP version errors

0 Unknown community name

0 Illegal operation for community name supplied

0 Encoding errors

0 Number of requested variables

0 Number of altered variables

0 Get-request PDUs

0 Get-next PDUs

0 Set-request PDUs

0 SNMP packets output

0 Too big errors

0 No such name errors

0 Bad values errors

0 General errors

0 Response PDUs

0 Trap PDUs

SNMP logging: disabled

SNMP ip filter group:

Console#

4-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

DHCP Commands

These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) client. You can configure any VLAN interface to be automatically assigned

an IP address via DHCP.

DHCP Client

Command

Function

Mod Pag

ip dhcp client-identifier Specifies the DHCP client identifier for this switch

ip dhcp restart client Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request

4-82

4-83

ip dhcp client-identifier

This command specifies the DCHP client identifier for the current interface. Use the

no form to remove this identifier.

Syntax

ip dhcp client-identifier {text text | hex hex}

no ip dhcp client-identifier

•

text - A text string. (Range: 1-15 characters)

hex - The hexadecimal value.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (VLAN)

Command Usage

This command is used to include a client identifier in all communications with

the DHCP server. The identifier type depends on the requirements of your

DHCP server.

Example

Console(config)#interface vlan 2

Console(config-if)#ip dhcp client-identifier hex 00-00-e8-66-65-72

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp restart client (4-83)

4-82

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DHCP Commands

ip dhcp restart client

This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that

has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command.

• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.

• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the

network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new

domain.

Example

In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console#ip dhcp restart client

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: Dhcp.

Console#

Related Commands

ip address (4-167)

4-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Interface Commands

These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an

Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.

Command

interface

Function

Mode Page

Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC

mode

description

Adds a description to an interface configuration

4-85

speed-duplex

Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC

when autonegotiation is disabled

negotiation

capabilities

Enables autonegotiation of a given interface

4-86

4-87

Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in

autonegotiation

flowcontrol

Enables flow control on a given interface

Force port type selected for combination ports

Disables an interface

4-88

combo-forced-mode

shutdown

switchport broadcast

packet-rate

Configures the broadcast storm control threshold

clear counters

Clears statistics on an interface

4-90

Connection Status” on page 3-39.

4-92

show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface

NE, PE

show interfaces

counters

Displays statistics for the specified interfaces

show interfaces

switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of an

interface

NE, PE

4-93

interface

This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode.

Use the no form to remove a trunk.

Syntax

interface interface

no interface port-channel channel-id

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

None

4-84

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interface Commands

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

To specify port 24, enter the following command:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24

Console(config-if)#

description

This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the

description.

Syntax

description string

no description

string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached

to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

The following example adds a description to port 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3

Console(config-if)#

speed-duplex

This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when

autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}

no speed-duplex

•

1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

4-85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default Setting

• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.

• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is 100half

for 100BASE-TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex

command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on the

selected interface.

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal

settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the speed/

duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be specified in

the capabilities list for an interface.

Example

The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-86)

capabilities (4-87)

negotiation

This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to

disable autonegotiation.

Syntax

[no] negotiation

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-86

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interface Commands

Command Usage

• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for

a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is disabled,

you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and

flowcontrol commands.

• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will also

be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.

Example

The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

capabilities (4-87)

speed-duplex (4-85)

capabilities

This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during

autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised

capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.

Syntax

[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol |

symmetric}

•

1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

flowcontrol - Supports flow control

symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives

pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine

the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch

ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.)

Default Setting

• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full

• 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH: 1000full

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch

will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command.

When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link

attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.

Example

The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half, 100full and

flow control.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-86)

speed-duplex (4-85)

flowcontrol (4-88)

flowcontrol

This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.

Syntax

[no] flowcontrol

Default Setting

Flow control enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or

segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,

back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex

operation.

• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol

command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on

the selected interface.

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal

settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable flow

control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the capabilities

list for any port

• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually

required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may

degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.

4-88

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interface Commands

Example

The following example enables flow control on port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-86)

capabilities (4-87)

shutdown

This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no

form.

Syntax

[no] shutdown

Default Setting

All interfaces are enabled.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior

(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been

resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.

Example

The following example disables port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#shutdown

Console(config-if)#

switchport broadcast packet-rate

This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to disable

broadcast storm control.

Syntax

switchport broadcast packet-rate rate

no switchport broadcast

rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., packets per second.

(Range: 500 - 262143)

4-89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default Setting

Enabled for all ports

Packet-rate limit: 500 packets per second

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above that

threshold are dropped.

• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected

interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the

switch.

Example

The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per

second:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#

clear counters

This command clears statistics on an interface.

Syntax

clear counters interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base

value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session.

However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics

displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power

reset.

4-90

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interface Commands

Example

The following example clears statistics on port 5.

Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5

Console#

show interfaces status

This command displays the status for an interface.

Syntax

show interfaces status [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

Shows the status for all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a

description of the items displayed by this command, see “Displaying

4-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX-EFM

Mac address: 00-01-00-02-00-04

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 650 packets/second

Flow control: Disabled

Lacp: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Current status:

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Console#

show interfaces counters

This command displays interface statistics.

Syntax

show interfaces counters [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

Shows the counters for all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a

description of the items displayed by this command, see “Showing Port

Statistics” on page 3-51.

4-92

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interface Commands

Example

Ethernet 1/ 1

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 113404, Octets output: 742007

Unicast input: 739, Unicast output: 836

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 482, Multi-cast output: 9

Broadcast input: 38, Broadcast output: 0

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 855411, Packets: 2104

Broadcast pkts: 38, Multi-cast pkts: 491

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 1332, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 123

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 15, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 142

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 9, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 483

Console#

Related Commands

show controllers ethernet-controller (4-109)

show interfaces switchport

This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified

interfaces.

Syntax

show interfaces switchport [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

Shows all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

Example

This example shows the configuration setting for port 2.

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2

Information of Eth 1/2

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 650 packets/second

Lacp status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

Egress rate limit: disable,100M bits per second

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0

Gvrp status: Disabled*

Allowed Vlan:

Forbidden Vlan:

Console#

1(u),

* Not supported in the present version

Field

Description

Broadcast threshold

Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also

shows the threshold level (page 4-89).

Lacp status

Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled

(page 4-99).

Ingress/Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit. (page 4-97).

VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 4-140).

Ingress rule

Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-141).

Acceptable frame type

Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only

(page 4-140).

Native VLAN

Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-142).

Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 4-147).

Allowed Vlan

Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and

“(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-142).

Forbidden Vlan

Shows the VLANs this interface cannot dynamically join via GVRP.*

* Not supported in the current version

4-94

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mirror Port Commands

This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.

Command

port monitor

Function

Configures a mirror session

Shows the configuration for a mirror port

Mode Page

4-95

4-96

show port monitor

port monitor

This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror

session.

Syntax

port monitor interface [rx | tx | both]

no port monitor interface

•

interface

• ethernet unit/port (source port)

- unit - Switch (unit 1)

- port - Port number

•

rx - Mirror received packets.

tx - Mirror transmitted packets.

both - Mirror both received and transmitted packets.

Default Setting

No mirror session is defined. When enabled, the default mirroring is for both

received and transmitted packets.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)

Command Usage

• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time

analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination

port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive

manner.

• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.

• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may be

dropped from the monitor port.

• You can create multiple mirror sessions, but all sessions must share the same

destination port. However, you should avoid sending too much traffic to the

destination port from multiple source ports.

4-95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 both

Console(config-if)#

show port monitor

This command displays mirror information.

Syntax

show port monitor [interface]

interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)

• unit - Switch (unit 1)

• port - Port number

Default Setting

Shows all sessions.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port,

and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX, RX/TX).

Example

The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show port monitor

Port Mirroring

-------------------------------------

Destination port(listen port):Eth1/1

Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6

Mode

:RX/TX

Console#

4-96

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Rate Limit Commands

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic

transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at

the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within

the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of

traffic are dropped.

Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is

configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to

verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded

without any changes.

Command

rate-limit

Function

Mode Page

IC 4-97

Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port

rate-limit

This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface. Use this command

without specifying a rate to restore the default rate. Use the no form to restore the

default status of disabled.

Syntax

rate-limit {input | output} [rate]

no rate-limit {input | output}

•

input – Input rate

output – Output rate

rate – Maximum value in Mbps. (Range: 100 Mbps for ports 1-12,

1000 Mbps for ports 13-14 with Gigabit modules installed)

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 600

Console(config-if)#

4-97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Link Aggregation Commands

Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the

bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link

between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have

to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches

have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to six trunks. For example, a

trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of

4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.

Command

Function

Mode

Page

Manual Configuration Commands

interface port-channel

Configures a trunk and enters interface

configuration mode for the trunk

channel-group

Adds a port to a trunk

IC (Ethernet)

Dynamic Configuration Command

lacp

Configures LACP for the current interface

Trunk Status Display Command

show interfaces status

port-channel

Shows trunk information

NE, PE

efm profile global (4-102)

show lacp

Shows LACP information

Guidelines for Creating Trunks

General Guidelines –

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network

cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• A trunk can have two Gigabit optional module ports.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including

communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN

assignments, and CoS settings.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added

or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the

specified port-channel.

Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:

• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.

• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).

• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a

channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the

same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used by

the interfaces that joined the group.

4-98

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Link Aggregation Commands

• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must be

set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.

• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.

channel-group

This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.

Syntax

channel-group channel-id

no channel-group

channel-id - Trunk index (Value: 1)

Default Setting

The current port will be added to this trunk.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco

EtherChannel standard.

• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.

• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.

Example

The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 13:

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#

lacp

This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the

current interface. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] lacp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

4-99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,

either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned

the next available port-channel ID.

• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will

be activated automatically.

• If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled,

the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if

one of the active links fails.

Example

The following shows LACP enabled on ports 13-14. Because LACP has also been

enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status

port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/14

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#exit

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 1000GBIC

Mac address: 00-00-e8-00-00-0b

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin status: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 1000full,

Flow control status: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: lacp

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 1000full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/13, Eth1/14,

Console#

4-100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

These commands are used to to configure and display communication parameters

for VDSL and Ethernet ports on the switch and connected CPEs.

Command

Function

Mod Page

efm profile global

Batch assigns profiles for speed to all the VDSL ports on the

switch

4-102

efm profile

efm reset

Assigns profiles for speed to individual VDSL ports

4-103

4-104

Resets the switch VDSL chipset or, if a CPE is connected, the

CPE VDSL chipset

efm shutdown

Disables the VDSL chipset transmitter of an EFM port that is not PE

being used

4-104

efm rdl

Enables/disables Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) mode

Sets the interleave parameters for the selected port

Sets the noise margin of the selected VDSL port

efm interleave

efm noise-margin

efm rate-adapt

Enables and disables the rate adaption feature on the selected IC

VDSL port

efm pbo

Enables and disables power back-off on the selected VDSL port IC

4-109

show controllers

ethernet-controller

Displays the Ethernet link transmit and receive statistics on a

specific VDSL port.

show controllers efm Displays the current values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL PE

actual port.

4-111

4-112

show controllers efm Displays the administrative settings of the VDSL link on a specific PE

admin VDSL port

show controllers efm Displays information about the Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) PE

profile

profiles available on the switch, and how they are assigned to the

VDSL ports

show controllers efm Displays the VDSL link statistics and profile information on a

status specific VDSL port

show controllers efm Displays the connected CPE Ethernet mode

remote ethernet mode

show controllers

efm-noise-margin

Displays the noise margin for the switch’s VDSL ports

show controllers efm Displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL

channel-performance line

show controllers efm Displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL

line-table

line

show controllers efm Displays physical interfaces information for the selected VDSL

phy-table port

show controllers efm Displays channel interface information for the selected VDSL port PE

channel-table

show controllers efm Displays line and channel performance data information during PE

current-performance the current 15 minute interval, and during the current day.

4-101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

efm profile global

Use this command to batch assign profiles for speed to all the VDSL ports on the

switch.

Syntax

efm profile global profile name

profile name - Name of the profile.

Default Setting

Default Profile

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Assigns the same profile to each VDSL switch port. Details of these profiles

are given in the table below.

Profile Name

ProfileType

Downstream Rate

(Mbps)

Upstream Rate

(Mbps)

Default

Public

Private

1.20

1.40

A1-02OAG-R1

A2-02OAG-R1

A3-01OAG-R1

A4-01OAG-R1

S1-03OAG-R1

S2-03OAG-R1

S3-00OAG-R1

S1-16-16

7.56

2.43

10.80

17.28

25.92

7.56

2.43

3.78

4.72

7.56

10.80

17.28

16.74

33.75

25.38

44.55

50.47

22.55

40.91

46.44

17.01

71.28

10.40

16.47

16.20

11.34

3.24

S2-16-16A

A1-34-11

A2-34-11A

A3-25-3

A4-45-5

5.13

A5-50-7

7.29

A6-22-3A

3.24

A7-40-5A

5.13

A8-46-7A

7.29

TLAN

5.40

Max-Rate

40.50

Notes: 1. The VDSL Intelligent Switch uses Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM), a

VDSL-based technology.

4-102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

2. A suffix of “A” in the profile name (e.g., S2-16-16A) indicates that this

profile is for both VDSL and ADSL lines in a bundle. Profiles without a

suffix of “A” in the profile name (e.g., S1-16-16) are for VDSL lines only.

3. The following profiles are recommended for use with this switch: S1-16-16,

S2-16-16A, A1-34-11, and- A2-34-11A.

4. The maximum distances for VDSL links using the recommended profiles

are:

Upstream

16 Mbps

11 Mbps

Downstream

16 Mbps

Mode

Symmetric

Asymetric

Max. Range

600m (1970 ft)

610m (2000 ft)

34 Mbps

5. Type-1 26 AWG (100 ohm)/0.4 mm, or Type-2 24 AWG (100 ohm)/0.5 mm

cable may be installed to achieve the maximum distance. However,

typically, 24 AWG (100 ohm)/0.5 mm wire is better than 26 AWG (100

ohm)/0.4 mm wire. Note that the distance may be limited by factors such

as how the cable is bundled, and the interference and noise on the link.

6. Public profiles conform to specific standards such as ANSI or ETSI.

Private profiles do not conform to these standards.

Example

Console#config

Console(config)#efm profile global S1-16-16

Console(config)#

Related Commands

efm profile (4-103)

efm profile

Use this command to assign profiles for speed to a specific VDSL port on the switch.

Syntax

efm profile profile name

profile name - Name of the profile.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

Assigns a profile to a specific VDSL port. For details of the these profiles see

efm profile global on page 4-102.

4-103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

The following example assigns EFM profile S1-16-16 to VDSL port 1.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm profile S1-16-16

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

efm reset

Use this command to reset the switch VDSL chipset or, if a CPE is connected, the

CPE VDSL chipset.

Syntax

efm reset {local | remote}

• local - Resets the CO-side VDSL chipset for a VDSL port.

• remote - Resets the CPE-side VDSL chipset of a VDSL port.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

Use this command to troubleshoot VDSL port performance.

Example

The following example resets the CO-side VDSL and CPE-side VDSL chipset of

VDSL port 1

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm reset local

Console(config-if)#efm reset remote

Console(config-if)#

efm shutdown

Use this command to disable a VDSL interface. To enable a disabled interface, use

the no form.

Syntax

[no] efm shutdown

Default Setting

All interfaces are enabled.

4-104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

Use this command to disable the VDSL chipset transmitter of a VDSL port that

is not connected to a working CPE. In some unusual circumstances, the

power emitted by VDSL ports can affect other VDSL ports. It is recommended

that ports that are not wired to CPEs be shut down in this way. Also use this

command to disable access to the switch from this port.

Example

The following example disables VDSL port 1.

Console (config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm shutdown

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

shutdown (4-89)

efm rdl

Use this command to enable Remote Digital Loopback (RDL). Use the no form of

this command to disable RDL.

Syntax

efm rdl

no efm rdl

Default Setting

Off

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) tests the link between the switch and the CPE

by sending out, and returning data through the CPE, over the VDSL link.

Example

The following example shows how to enable/disable RDL on VDSL port 1.

Console (config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm rdl

Console(config-if)#no efm rdl

Console(config-if)#

4-105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

efm interleave

This command sets the interleave parameters for the selected VDSL port.

Syntax

efm interleave [downstream M value] [upstream M value]

[downstream I value] [upstream I value]

no efm interleave

•

M value – M is the interleaving depth index. Range: 0-64

I value – I is the interleaving block length. Range: 4 or 8

Default Setting

•

M – The interleaving depth index.

Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 16

•

I – The interleaving block length.

Upstream default value: 8, Downstream default value: 8

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse

noise. A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against

pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the effective

bandwidth of the link. The degree of interleaving can be increased by

increasing M or I.

Example

The following example configures VDSL port 1 with:

•

M - downstream value: 16, Upstream value: 8

I - downstream value: 8, Upstream value: 8

Console#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm interleave 16 8 8 8

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1/1

Interface

Link

SNR (dB)

RS Errs

Interleaver

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

DS.M DS.I US.M US.I PBO

------------- ---- -------------------- -------- ------------------- ---

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

43.0 35.0 45.0 43.0 0

8 on

Related Commands

efm noise-margin (4-107)

show controllers efm-noise-margin (4-116)

4-106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

efm noise-margin

This command sets the noise margin of the selected VDSL port. Use the no form of

this command to disable this feature.

Syntax

efm noise-margin [downstream noise margin] [upstream noise margin]

no efm noise-margin

•

downstream noise margin - A measure of the amount of noise that the

downstream VDSL line can tolerate before the signal is affected.

Range: 0-9

•

upstream noise margin - A measure of the amount of noise that the

upstream VDSL line can tolerate before the signal is affected.

Range: 0-9

Default Setting

0 (disabled)

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

When rate adaptation is enabled, (see “efm rate-adapt” on page 4-108) the

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is an indicator of link quality. The switch itself has

no internal functions to ensure link quality. To ensure a stable link, you should

add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). The table

below lists theoretical minimum SNR’s for the VDSL profiles configurable on this

switch.

Profile Name

Theoretical Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB)

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

Not Used Not Used

Default

A1-02OAG-R1

A2-02OAG-R1

A3-01OAG-R1

A4-01OAG-R1

S1-03OAG-R1

S2-03OAG-R1

S3-00OAG-R1

S1-16-16

Not Used

A1-34-11

S2-16-16A

A2-34-11A

A3-25-3

Not used

A4-45-5

A5-50-7

4-107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Profile Name

Theoretical Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB)

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

A6-22-3A

A7-40-5A

A8-46-7A

TLAN

Not Used

Max-Rate

Example

The following example configures VDSL port 1 with an upstream noise margin of 6,

and a downstream noise margin of 6.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm noise-margin 6 6

Console(config-if)#end

Related Commands

efm interleave (4-106)

efm rate-adapt

This command enables and disables the rate adaption feature on the selected VDSL

port.

Syntax

efm rate-adapt

no efm rate-adapt

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors such as temperature,

humidity, and electro-magnetic radiation. When rate adaption is enabled, the

switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for the current conditions.

Example

The following example shows rate adaption enabled for port 1.

onsole#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm rate-adapt

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

rate-limit (4-97)

4-108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

efm pbo

This command enables and disables power back-off on the selected VDSL port.

Syntax

[no] efm pbo

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

If PBO is enabled, the power of transmission from the port will automatically be

adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port.

Example

The following example enables power back-off for port 1.

onsole#config

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#efm pbo

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show interfaces counters (4-92)

show controllers ethernet-controller

Use this command to display the Ethernet link transmit and receive statistics for a

specific VDSL port, or for all the VDSL ports on the switch and the connected CPE.

Syntax

show controllers ethernet-controller interface-id

interface-id - ID of the VDSL port

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

Using this command without specifying a VDSL port displays the Ethernet link

statistics of all ports on the switch and on the connected CPE devices. The

output shows the statistics collected by the VDSL chipset on the switch, and

the statistics collected by the VDSL chipset on the CPE.

4-109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#show controllers ethernet-controller ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/2 :

EFM PHY on Switch:

Transmit

9671624 Bytes Transmitted

8487 Frames Transmitted

0 Pause frames

0 Single Collision Frames

0 Multiple collisions

0 Late collisions

0 Excessive collisions

0 Deferred frames

0 Carrier sense errors

Receive

1406434 Bytes Received

17551 Frames Received

0 Broadcast frames

0 Pause frames

0 Alignment errors

0 Collisions and Runts

0 Oversize frames

0 FCS errors

EFM MAC on CPE:

Transmit

0 Bytes Transmitted

0 Frames Transmitted

0 Pause frames

0 Single Collision Frames

0 Multiple collisions

0 Late collisions

0 Excessive collisions

0 Deferred frames

0 Carrier sense errors

Receive

0 Bytes Received

0 Frames Received

0 Broadcast frames

0 Pause frames

0 Alignment errors

0 Collisions and Runts

0 Oversize frames

0 FCS errors

Console#

Related Commands

4-110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

show controllers efm actual

Use this command to display the current values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL

port.

Syntax

show controllers efm interface-id actual {dsrserrs | usrserrs | txpower |

rxpower | snr | link}

• interface-id - ID of the VDSL port.

• dsrserrs - Displays the downstream Reed-Solomon errors on the VDSL port.

• link - Displays the VDSL link status of the VDSL port.

• rxpower - Displays the local receive power (dBm/Hz) on the remote customer

premises equipment (CPE) port.

• snr - Displays the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) on the VDSL port.

• txpower - Displays the remote transmit power (dBm/Hz) on the VDSL port.

• usrserrs - Displays the upstream Reed-Solomon errors on the VDSL port.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

SNR and Reed-Solomon error information display the quality of the VDSL link.

• The SNR represents the upper limit of received signal-to-noise ratio that the

switch will handle before disconnecting from the remote CPE.

• The Reed-Solomon errors show the number of errors detected and corrected in

the data being received on, and transmitted from, the VDSL ports.

Reed-Solomon errors are the result of noise exceeding the noise margin.

Example

The following example displays the current values of the VDSL link on VDSL switch

port 2.

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual dsrserrs

Downstream Reed-Solomon errors: 0

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual link

Link status: Down

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual rxpower

Local receive power: 26.00 dBm/Hz

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual snr

SNR: 27.00 dB

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual txpower

Remote transmit power: -89.70 dBm/Hz

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/2 actual usrserrs

Upstream Reed-Solomon errors: 0

Console#

4-111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Related Commands

show controllers efm profile (4-112)

show controllers efm admin

Use this command to display the actual values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL

port.

Syntax

show controllers efm interface-id admin {dsrate | usrate}

• interface-id - ID of the VDSL port.

• dsrate - Displays the downstream rate (Mbps) of the VDSL link.

• usrate - Displays the upstream rate (Mbps) of the VDSL link.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

This command displays the downstream and upstream rates of VDSL port 1.

Example

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/1 admin usrate

Upstream rate: 12.50 Mbps

Console#show controller efm Ethernet 1/1 admin dsrate

Downstream rate: 12.50 Mbps

Console#

Related Commands

show controllers efm profile (4-112)

show controllers efm profile

Use this command to to display information about the profiles available on the

switch, and how they are assigned to the VDSL ports.

Syntax

show controllers efm profile {mapping | names}

• mapping - Displays a list of the VDSL ports and their assigned profiles.

• names - Displays the names, types, and upstream and downstream data

rates of all profiles available on the switch. Overall data rates are displayed.

The usable data rates are somewhat lower.

Default Setting

None

4-112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

See efm profile global (4-102) for the VDSL profiles shipped with the switch,

and for the their upstream and downstream data rates.

Examples

This example displays VDSL profiles and link status for the switch’s VDSL ports.

Console#show controllers efm profile mapping

Interface

Port Profile

--------------------

Default

S1-16-16

Default

Status

--------

Active

-------------

Ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/3

Ethernet 1/4

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

Ethernet 1/9

Ethernet 1/10

Ethernet 1/11

Ethernet 1/12

Console#

Default

This example displays profile names, type (Public or Private), and downstream

and upstream rates for all the VDSL profiles configured on this switch.

Console#show controllers efm profile names

Profile Name

--------------------

Default

Type

Downstream Rate(Mbps)

---------------------

1.20

7.56

10.80

17.28

25.92

7.56

10.80

17.28

16.74

33.75

25.38

44.55

50.49

Upstream Rate(Mbps)

---------------------

-------

Public

Private

1.40

2.43

3.78

4.72

7.56

10.40

16.47

16.20

11.34

3.24

5.13

7.29

3.24

5.13

7.29

5.40

40.50

A1-02OAG-R1

A2-02OAG-R1

A3-01OAG-R1

A4-01OAG-R1

S1-03OAG-R1

S2-03OAG-R1

S3-00OAG-R1

S1-16-16

S2-16-16A

A1-34-11

A2-34-11A

A3-25-3

A4-45-5

A5-50-7

A6-22-3A

A7-40-5A

A8-46-7A

TLAN

Max-Rate

22.55

40.91

46.44

17.01

71.28

Console#

Related Commands

“VDSL Port Link Status” on page 3-61.

4-113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show controllers efm status

Use this command to display the VDSL link statistics and profile information on a

specific VDSL port including link state, link duration, data rates, power levels,

signal-to-noise ratio, and Reed-Solomon errors.

Syntax

show controllers efm status {link | profile} interface-id

• interface-id - ID of the VDSL port

• link - Displays VDSL link parameters and status.

• profile - Displays VDSL link parameters and status.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

SNR and Reed-Solomon error information display the quality of the VDSL link.

• The SNR represents the upper limit of received signal to noise ratio that the

switch will handle before disconnecting from the remote CPE.

• The Reed-Solomon errors show the number of errors detected and corrected in

the data being received on, and transmitted from, the VDSL ports.

Reed-Solomon errors are the result of noise exceeding the noise margin.

Note: The Reed-Solomon errors are reset each time the show controllers efm

status link command is performed.

• Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse noise.

A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against pulse noise

but will increase transmission delay and reduce the effective bandwidth of the

link. The degree of interleaving can be increased by increasing M or I. M is the

interleaving depth index and I is the interleaving block length. For details see

• If PBO is enabled, the power of transmission from the port will automatically be

adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port.

Examples

This example displays the link status, signal-to-noise ratio, Reed-Solomon errors,

and interleaver parameters for the VDSL link for port 1.

Console#show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1/1

Interface

Link

SNR (dB)

RS Errs

Interleaver

DS1 DS2 US1 US2

DS.M DS.I US.M US.I PBO

------------- ---- -------------------- -------- ------------------- ---

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

45.0 35.0 46.0 44.0 0

8 on

4-114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

This example displays the link status, uptime, profile name, downstream and

upstream rates, and the number of link failures for the switch’s VDSL ports.

Interface

Link Uptime

Profile Name

DSRate USRate Fail

------------- ---- -------- -------------------- ------ ------ ----

Ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/3

Ethernet 1/4

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

0:38:30 default

0: 0: 0 default

4.17

0.00

1.56

0.00

Down

Related Commands

show controllers efm interface-id actual

show controllers efm interface-id admin

show controllers efm remote ethernet mode

Use this command to display the connected CPE Ethernet mode.

Syntax

show controllers efm remote ethernet mode interface-id

interface-id – ID of the VDSL port.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Command Usage

This command displays the speed and duplex mode for the CPE side VDSL

link.

Examples

Console#show controllers efm remote ethernet mode ethernet 1/1

Interface

Speed

----------

100

Duplex

--------

Full

-------------

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

Related Commands

show controllers efm channel-performance (4-117)

4-115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show controllers efm-noise-margin

This command displays the noise margin for the switch’s VDSL ports.

Syntax

show controllers efm noise-margin

Default Setting

Default: 0 dBm

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Example

This example displays the downstream (DS) and upstream (US) noise-margin for

the switch’s VDSL ports.

Console#show controllers efm noise-margin

Interface

Noise Margin

DS US

-------------

0 0

--------------

Ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/3

Ethernet 1/4

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

Ethernet 1/9

Ethernet 1/10

Ethernet 1/11

Ethernet 1/12

Ethernet 1/13

Ethernet 1/14

Console#

Related Commands

show controllers efm channel-performance (4-117)

4-116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

show controllers efm channel-performance

This command displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL line.

For details see “Displaying VDSL Interface Information” on page 3-66.

Syntax

show controllers efm channel-performance {vtu-r | vtu-c} [fast | slow]

[interface] {15-minutes | 1-day}

•

vtu-r – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the remote end of the line

vtu-r – VTU Transceiver at the near (central) end of the line

fast – Fast channel

slow – Slow channel

interface – Ethernet interface to display

• unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

•

15-minutes – Performance at intervals of 15 minutes

1-day – Performance at intervals of 1 day

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Example

Console#show controllers efm channel-performance vtu-c fast 1/1 1-day

VDSL_CHAN_1DAY_INTERVAL_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Interval Number at interval 1 day

Channel Interval monitoring at interval 1 day

Channel Interval Bad Blocks at interval 1 day

Console#

Related Commands

show controllers efm line-table

This command displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL line.

For details see “Displaying VDSL Interface Information” on page 3-66.

Syntax

show controllers efm line-table

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

4-117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#show controllers efm line-table

VDSL_LINE_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/1

Line Coding

Line Type

Line Config Profile

Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL

DEFVAL

VDSL_LINE_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/12

Console#

Line Coding

Line Type

Line Config Profile

Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL

DEFVAL

Parameter

Description

Line Coding

Specifies the VDSL coding type used on this line.

1. Others (none of the following)

2. Multiple Carrier Modulation

3. Single Carrier Modulation

Line Type

Defines the type of VDSL physical line by defining whether and how the line is

channelized.

1. No channels exist

2. Only fast channels exist

3. Only interleaved channels exists

4. Either fast or interleaved channels exist

5. Both fast and interleaved channels exist

Config Profile

In this version, only “DEFVAL” is displayed.

Alarm Config Profile

The alarm profile is pre-configured to send trap messages via SNMP protocol

to register errors on the VDSL line.

show controllers efm phy-table

This command displays physical interface information for the selected VDSL port.

For details see “Displaying VDSL Interface Information” on page 3-66.

Syntax

show controllers efm phy-table {vtu-r | vtu-c} [interface]

•

vtu-r – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the remote end of the line

vtu-c – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the near (central) end of the line

interface – Ethernet interface to display

• unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

4-118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Example

Console#show controllers efm phy-table vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_PHYS_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/1

Serial Number

Vendor ID

Version Number

Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin 45

Current Attenuation

Current Status

Current Output Power

Current Attainable Rate

Current Line Rate

ACCTON

-12

1350000

Console#

show controllers efm channel-table

This command displays channel interface information for the selected VDSL port.

For details see “Displaying VDSL Interface Information” on page 3-66.

Syntax

show controllers efm channel-table {vtu-r | vtu-c} [interface]

•

vtu-r – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the remote end of the line

vtu-c – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the near (central) end of the line

interface – Ethernet interface to display

• unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

Example

Console#show controllers efm channel-table vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_CHAN_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

Channel Interleave Delay

Channel CRC Block Length

Channel Current Transmit Rate

Channel Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect

Channel Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction

4-119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show controllers efm current-performance

Use this command to display line and channel performance data information for the

current 15 minute interval, and for the current day.

Syntax

show controllers efm current-performance {vtu-r | vtu-c} [interface]

•

vtu-r – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the remote end of the line

vtu-c – VTU (VDSL Transceiver Unit) at the near (central) end of the line

interface – Ethernet interface to display

• unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC

4-120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VDSL Commands

Example

Console#show controllers efm current-performance vtu-c 1/1

VDSL_PERF_DATA_ENTRY :

Ethernet 1/1

Loss of Framing

Loss of Signal

Loss of Power

Loss of Link

Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Line Initialization Attempts 0

Ethernet 1/1

Elapsed Seconds at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Framing at inteval 15 minutes

Loss of Signal at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Power at interval 15 minutes

Loss of Link at interval 15 minutes

Errored Second at interval 15 minutes

Severely Errored Second at interval 15 minutes

Unavailable Second at interval 15 minutes

Line Initialization Attempts at interval 15 minutes

Valid Intervals at interval 15 minutes

Invalid Intervals at interval 15 minutes

Ethernet 1/1

Time Elapsed at interval 1 day

Loss of Frame at interval 1 day

Loss of Signal at interval 1 day

Loss of Power at interval 1 day

Loss of Link at interval 1 day

Errored Second at interval 1 day

Severely Errored Second at interval 1 day

Unavailable Second at interval 1 day

Line Initialization Attempts at interval 1 day

Valid Intervals at interval 1 day

Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

10861

VDSL_CHAN_PERF_DATA_ENTRY : (SLOW)

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Current Fixed Octets

Channel Current Bad Block

Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 15 minutes

Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 15 minutes

Channel Current Bad Block at interval 15 minutes

Channel Valid Intervals

276

Channel Invalid Intervals

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 1 day

Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 1 day

Channel Current Bad Block at interval 1 day

Channel Valid Intervals at interval 1 day

Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

11076

VDSL_CHAN_PERF_DATA_ENTRY : (FAST)

Ethernet 1/1

Channel Current Fixed Octets

Ethernet 1/1

Console#

Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day

4-121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Address Table Commands

These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified

addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.

Command

Function

Mode Page

mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN

4-122

clear mac-address-table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE

dynamic

show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database

4-124

mac-address-table

aging-time

Sets the aging time of the address table

show mac-address-table Shows the aging time for the address table

aging-time

4-125

mac-address-table static

This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no

form to remove an address.

Syntax

mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface vlan vlan-id [action]

no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id

•

mac-address - MAC address.

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1

- port - Port number

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

action

•

- delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.

- permanent - Assignment is permanent.

Default Setting

No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within

a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC

Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:

• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given

interface link is down.

4-122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Address Table Commands

• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.

When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored

and will not be written to the address table.

• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed

with the no form of this command.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface

ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

clear mac-address-table dynamic

This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and

clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic

show mac-address-table

This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.

Syntax

show mac-address-table

[

address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]

[vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]

mac-address - MAC address.

• mask - Bits to match in the address.

• interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

• sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each

interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:

• Learned - Dynamic address entries

• Permanent - Static entry

• Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset

• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit

mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC

address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0” means

to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of

00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

means “any.”

• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.

Example

Console#show mac-address-table

Interface Mac Address

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/ 1 00-e0-29-94-34-de 1 Delete-on-reset

Console#

Vlan Type

mac-address-table aging-time

This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form

to restore the default aging time.

Syntax

mac-address-table aging-time seconds

no mac-address-table aging-time

seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-1000000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)

Default Setting

300 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100

Console(config)#

4-124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

show mac-address-table aging-time

This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac-address-table aging-time

Aging time: 300 sec.

Console#

Spanning Tree Commands

This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)

globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.

Command

spanning-tree

spanning-tree mode

Function

Enables the spanning tree protocol

Configures STP, RSTP mode

Mode Page

spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time

spanning-tree hello-time

spanning-tree max-age

spanning-tree priority

Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time

Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age

Configures the spanning tree bridge priority

Configures the path cost method for RSTP

spanning-tree

path-cost method

spanning-tree

transmission-limit

Configures the transmission limit for RSTP

4-130

spanning-tree cost

Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface

Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface

Enables fast forwarding for edge ports

spanning-tree port-priority

spanning-tree edge-port

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree link-type

Sets an interface to fast forwarding

Configures the link type for RSTP

spanning-tree

protocol-migration

Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format

show spanning-tree

Shows spanning tree configuration for the common

spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or

an instance within the multiple spanning tree

spanning-tree cost (4-131)

4-125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

spanning-tree

This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the

no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree

Default Setting

Spanning tree is enabled.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable

network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or

routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is,

an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only

one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup

links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.

Example

This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#

spanning-tree mode

This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp}

no spanning-tree mode

•

stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

Default Setting

rstp

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.

4-126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the

incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol

messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration

delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge

and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an

RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration

delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.Example

The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:

Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp

Console(config)#

spanning-tree forward-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this

switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree forward-time seconds

no spanning-tree forward-time

seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].

Default Setting

15 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait

before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is

required because every device must receive information about topology

changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to

listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding

state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

4-127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#

spanning-tree hello-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree hello-time time

no spanning-tree hello-time

time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).

The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].

Default Setting

2 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device

transmits a configuration message.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#

spanning-tree max-age

This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this

switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree max-age seconds

no spanning-tree max-age

seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].

The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].

Default Setting

20 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without

receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device

ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at

regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last

configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If

it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports

attached to the network.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40

Console(config)#

spanning-tree priority

This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the

no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree priority priority

no spanning-tree priority

priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)

(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,

20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344,

61440)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated

port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.

However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC

address will then become the root device.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000

Console(config)#

4-129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

spanning-tree pathcost method

This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use

the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}

no spanning-tree pathcost method

•

long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.

short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.

Default Setting

Long method

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.

Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,

and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost

(page 4-131) takes precedence over port priority (page 4-132).

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#

spanning-tree transmission-limit

This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of

consecutive RSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree transmission-limit count

no spanning-tree transmission-limit

count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.

4-130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Console(config)#

spanning-tree cost

This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree cost cost

no spanning-tree cost

cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-200,000,000))

The recommended range is:

• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000

• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000

• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000

Default Setting

• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000

• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000

• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best

path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports

attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower

media.

• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.

• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-130) is set to short, the

maximum value for path cost is 65,535.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50

Console(config-if)#

4-131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

spanning-tree port-priority

This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree port-priority priority

no spanning-tree port-priority

priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)

Default Setting

128

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree

Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with

the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in

the spanning tree.

• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest

numeric identifier will be enabled.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0

Related Commands

spanning-tree edge-port

This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree edge-port

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

Command Usage

• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is

at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause

forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding

state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as

workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the

amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during

reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate

reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other

STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should only

be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast command.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree portfast (4-133)

spanning-tree portfast

This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast

forwarding.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree portfast

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the

selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and Learning states, and

proceed straight to Forwarding.

• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through

the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard

convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for

end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related

timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for

ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an

end-node device.)

• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included

for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may

be removed for future software versions.

4-133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#bridge-group 1 portfast

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree edge-port (4-132)

spanning-tree link-type

This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}

no spanning-tree link-type

•

auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.

point-to-point - Point-to-point link.

shared - Shared medium.

Default Setting

auto

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one

other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.

• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the

duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a

half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.

• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate

a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

4-134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Spanning Tree Commands

spanning-tree protocol-migration

This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected

interface.

Syntax

spanning-tree protocol-migration interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or

Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected

interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the

spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually re-check

the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or

STP-compatible).

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration

Console(config-if)#

show spanning-tree

This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree (CST) or for

an instance within the multiple spanning tree (MST).

Syntax

show spanning-tree [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the

spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every interface in the tree.

• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree

configuration for an interface.

• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree information,” see

“Configuring Global Settings” on page 3-79. For a description of the items

displayed for specific interfaces, see “Displaying Interface Settings” on

page 3-81.

Example

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode

:RSTP

Spanning tree enable/disable

Priority

:enable

:32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.)

Bridge Max Age (sec.)

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)

Root Hello Time (sec.)

Root Max Age (sec.)

Root Forward Delay (sec.)

Designated Root

:20

:15

:20

:15

:32768.000087654321

Current root port

Current root cost

Number of topology changes

:200000

Last topology changes time (sec.):18131

Transmission limit

Path Cost Method

:long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status

Role

: enable

: root

State

Path cost

: forwarding

: 100000

Priority

: 128

Designated cost

Designated port

Designated root

Designated bridge

Fast forwarding

: 200000

: 128.24

: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

: 32768.0.0030F1552000

: disable

Forward transitions : 1

Admin edge port

Oper edge port

Admin Link type

Oper Link type

: enable

: disable

: auto

: point-to-point

Console#

4-136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Commands

A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but

communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section

describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how

VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected

interface.

Command Groups

Function

Page

Editing VLAN Groups

Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state

Configuring VLAN

Interfaces

Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress 4-139

tagging mode, ingress filtering, and PVID

Displaying VLAN

Information

Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses 4-143

Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports

Editing VLAN Groups

Command

vlan database

Function

Mode Page

Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete GC

VLANs

vlan

Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state

4-138

vlan database

This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take

effect immediately.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.

After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by

entering the show vlan command.

• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode

and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are

written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by entering

the show running-config command.

4-137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

show vlan (4-143)

vlan

This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or

delete a VLAN.

Syntax

vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]

no vlan vlan-id [name | state]

•

vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.

vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

media ethernet - Ethernet media type.

state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.

- active - VLAN is operational.

•

- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.

Default Setting

By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.

Command Mode

VLAN Database Configuration

Command Usage

• no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.

• no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.

• no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).

• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.

Example

The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN

is activated by default.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet

Console(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

show vlan (4-143)

4-138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Commands

Configuring VLAN Interfaces

Command

interface vlan

Function

Mode Page

Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC

4-139

4-140

switchport mode

Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface

Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface

switchport

acceptable-frame-types

switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface

4-141

switchport acceptable-frame-types (4-140)

switchport native vlan

switchport allowed vlan

Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface

Configures the VLANs associated with an interface

interface vlan

This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to

configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.

Syntax

interface vlan vlan-id

vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to

VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

shutdown (4-89)

4-139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

switchport mode

This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form

to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport mode {trunk | hybrid}

no switchport mode

•

trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct

link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify

the source VLAN. However, note that frames belonging to the port’s default

VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are sent untagged.

hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged

or untagged frames.

Default Setting

All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the

switchport mode to hybrid:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

switchport acceptable-frame-types

This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}

no switchport acceptable-frame-types

•

all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.

tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.

Default Setting

All frame types

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Commands

Command Usage

When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged

are assigned to the default VLAN.

Example

The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged

frames:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

switchport mode (4-140)

switchport ingress-filtering

This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore

the default.

Syntax

[no] switchport ingress-filtering

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for

which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except

for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for

which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such STA.

However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable

ingress filtering:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#

4-141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

switchport native vlan

This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no

form to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport native vlan vlan-id

no switchport native vlan

vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

VLAN 1

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,

the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member.

For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged

member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the

PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.

Example

The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

Console(config-if)#

switchport allowed vlan

This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form

to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport allowed vlan

{

add vlan-list [tagged untagged] | remove vlan-list}

no switchport allowed vlan

•

add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.

remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.

vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no

spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading

zeros. (Range: 1-4093).

Default Setting

All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.

The default frame type is untagged.

4-142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VLAN Commands

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at

least one VLAN as untagged.

• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only

assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.

• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter

used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or

remove the tag from a frame on egress.

• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the

connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs as

an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN

as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface.

• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that

interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that

interface.

Example

The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as

tagged VLANs for port 1:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged

Console(config-if)#

Displaying VLAN Information

Command

show vlan

Function

Shows VLAN information

Mode Page

NE, PE 4-143

show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface

NE, PE

4-93

show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an

interface

show vlan

This command shows VLAN information.

Syntax

show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name]

•

id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.

vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)

•

name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.

vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

4-143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default Setting

Shows all VLANs.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:

Console#show vlan id 1

VLAN Type

Name

Status

Ports/Channel groups

---- ------- ---------------- --------- ----------------------------------

1 Static

DefaultVlan

Active Eth1/ 1 Eth1/ 2 Eth1/ 3 Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

Eth1/ 6 Eth1/ 7 Eth1/ 8 Eth1/ 9 Eth1/10

Eth1/11 Eth1/12 Eth1/13 Eth1/14 Eth1/15

Eth1/16 Eth1/17 Eth1/18 Eth1/19 Eth1/20

Eth1/21 Eth1/22 Eth1/23 Eth1/24

Console#

Configuring Private VLANs

pvlan

Use this command in global configuration mode to enable or configure private

VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable it.

Command

Function

Mode Pag

pvlan

Enables Private VLAN globally for the switch

Configures uplink and downlink ports

4-145

pvlan up-link down-link

show pvlan

shows the private VLAN configuration settings on this PE

switch

Syntax

pvlan

pvlan up-link interface-list down-link interface-list

no pvlan

• up-link – Specifies a list of uplink interfaces.

• down-link – Specifies a list of downlink interfaces.

Default Setting

No pvlan

Command Mode

Global configuration

4-144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring Private VLANs

Command Usage

A Private VLAN allows modification of the default VLAN to provide port-based

security and isolation between ports within the VLAN. Data traffic on the

downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from, the uplink port. Private

VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch.

Example

This example globally enables private vlan, and then configures ports 13 and 14 as

uplink ports, and ports 1-8 as downlink ports.

Console(config)#pvlan

Console(config)#Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/13-14 down-link

ethernet 1/1-8

Console(config)#end

Console#

show pvlan

Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch.

Syntax

show pvlan

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Executive

Example

Console#show pvlan

Private VLAN status: Enabled

Up-link port:

Ethernet 1/13

Ethernet 1/14

Down-link port:

Ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/2

Ethernet 1/3

Ethernet 1/4

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

Console#

4-145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Bridge Extension Commands

This section describes how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge

Extension MIB.

Command

show bridge-ext

Function

Mode Pag

Shows the global bridge extension configuration

See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 3-88 and “Displaying Bridge

show bridge-ext

This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Extension Capabilities” on page 3-10 for a description of the displayed items.

Example

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support vlan numbers: 255

Max support vlan ID: 4093

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

4-146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets

have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.

This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a

port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority

queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each

queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Command Groups

Function

Page

Priority (Layer 2)

Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights,

and maps class of service tags to hardware queues

Priority (Layer 3 and 4)

Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP tags to class of

service values

4-152

Priority Commands (Layer 2)

Command

Function

Mod Page

switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames

show queue bandwidth (4-151)

4-148

queue mode

Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted

Round-Robin (WRR)

queue bandwidth

Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues

Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues

Shows the current queue mode

queue cos map

show queue mode

show queue bandwidth

show queue cos-map

Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE

Shows the class-of-service map

show interfaces

switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of an

interface

switchport priority default

This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to

restore the default value.

Syntax

switchport priority default default-priority-id

no switchport priority default

default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.

The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.

Default Setting

The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on

the interface is zero.

4-147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP, and

default switchport priority.

• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to

accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This

priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming

frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits

will be used.

• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It is configured to use

Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth

command. Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the

input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the appropriate

priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress ports is zero.

Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in

queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an untagged member

of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to

transmission.)

Example

The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#interface ethernet 1/3

queue mode

This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin

(WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the

default value.

Syntax

queue mode {strict | wrr}

no queue mode

•

strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all

traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using

scheduling weights 1, 3, 5, 7 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.

Default Setting

Weighted Round Robin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

Command Usage

You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that

requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower

priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing

that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative

weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the

switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This

prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.

Example

The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:

Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#

queue bandwidth

This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four class of

service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.

Syntax

queue bandwidth weight1...weight4

no queue bandwidth

weight1...weight4 - The ratio of weights for queues 0 - 3 determines the

weights used by the WRR scheduler. (Range: 1 - 15)

Default Setting

Weights 1, 4, 16, 64 are assigned to queues 0 - 3 respectively.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling

weights.

Example

This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues:

Console(config)#queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7

Console(config)#

Related Commands

4-149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

queue cos-map

This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues

(i.e., hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default

values.

Syntax

queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]

no queue cos-map

•

queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.

Ranges are 0 to 4, where 4 is the highest priority queue.

cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a

space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7,

where 7 is the highest priority.

Default Setting

This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues, with

Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes

are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according

to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.

Queue

Priority

1, 2

0, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.

• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.

Example

The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one-to-one

mapping:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2

Console(config-if)#exit

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3

Related Commands

show queue cos-map (4-151)

4-150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

show queue mode

This command shows the current queue mode.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#sh queue mode

Wrr status: Enabled

Console#

show queue bandwidth

This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for

the eight priority queues.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show queue bandwidth

Queue ID Weight

-------- ------

Console#

show queue cos-map

This command shows the class of service priority map.

Syntax

show queue cos-map interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

None

4-151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 1 2 3 2

Console#

Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)

Command

map ip precedence

map ip dscp

Function

Mode Page

Enables IP precedence class of service mapping

Maps IP precedence value to a class of service

Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping

Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service

map ip dscp

show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map

show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map

map ip precedence (Global Configuration)

This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service). Use the

no form to disable IP precedence mapping.

Syntax

[no] map ip precedence

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP, and

default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these

priority types will automatically disable the other type.

Example

The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#

4-152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)

This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service priority). Use the

no form to restore the default table.

Syntax

map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value

no map ip precedence

•

precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)

cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

The list below shows the default priority mapping.

IP Precedence Value

CoS Value

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP, and

default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a

one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard,

and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.

• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.

Example

The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#

map ip dscp (Global Configuration)

This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point

mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.

Syntax

[no] map ip dscp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP, and

default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these

priority types will automatically disable the other type.

Example

The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip dscp

Console(config)#

map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)

This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point

priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.

Syntax

map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value

no map ip dscp

•

dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-255)

cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the

DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.

IP DSCP Value

CoS Value

10, 12, 14, 16

18, 20, 22, 24

26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36

38, 40, 42

46, 56

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP, and

default switchport priority.

• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according

to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently

mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.

• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.

4-154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

Example

The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#

map ip port (Global Configuration)

Use this command to enable IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for

TCP/UDP sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.

Syntax

map ip port

no map ip port

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,

and default switchport priority.

Example

The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip port

Console(config)#

map ip port (Interface Configuration)

Use this command to set IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the no

form to remove a specific setting.

Syntax

map ip port port-number cos cos-value

no map ip port port-number

•

port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number. (Range: 0-65535)

cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

None

4-155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show map ip precedence

This command shows the IP precedence priority map.

Syntax

show map ip precedence interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5

Precedence mapping status: disabled

Port

Precedence COS

--------- ---------- ---

Eth 1/ 5

Console#

Related Commands

map ip precedence (Global Configuration) (4-152)

map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) (4-153)

show map ip dscp

This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.

Syntax

show map ip dscp interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

4-156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Priority Commands

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1

DSCP mapping status: disabled

Port

DSCP COS

--------- ---- ---

Eth 1/ 1

Console#

Related Commands

map ip dscp (Global Configuration) (4-153)

map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) (4-154)

show map ip port

Use this command to show the IP port priority map.

Syntax

show map ip port [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

unit - This is device 1.

port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:

Console#show map ip port

TCP port mapping status: disabled

Port

--------- -------- ---

Eth 1/ 5 80

Console#

Port no. COS

Related Commands

map ip port (Interface Configuration) (4-155)

Multicast Filtering Commands

This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any

attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports

containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then

propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to

ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Command Groups

Function

Pag

IGMP Snooping

Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment, 4-158

sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and query settings,

and displays the multicast service and group members

IGMP Query

Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4-161

Static Multicast Routing

Configures static multicast router ports

See “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on page 3-110 for a

IGMP Snooping Commands

Command

Function

Mode Pag

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping

ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group

ip igmp snooping version

show ip igmp snooping

Configures the IGMP version for snooping

Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration

Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list

show mac-address-table

multicast

ip igmp snooping

This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping

4-158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering Commands

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following example enables IGMP snooping.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping vlan static

This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface

•

vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

ip-address - IP address for multicast group

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping version

This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore

the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}

no ip igmp snooping version

•

1 - IGMP Version 1

2 - IGMP Version 2

4-159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Default Setting

IGMP Version 2

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy

devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to

configure this switch to use Version 1.

Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp

query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.

Example

The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1

Console(config)#

show ip igmp snooping

This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

description of the displayed items.

Example

The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:

Console#show ip igmp snooping

Service status: Enabled

Querier status: Enabled

Query count: 2

Query interval: 125 sec

Query max response time: 10 sec

Router port expire time: 300 sec

IGMP snooping version: Version 2

Console#

4-160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering Commands

show mac-address-table multicast

This command shows known multicast addresses.

Syntax

show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [user | igmp-snooping]

•

vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)

user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.

igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected

options.

Example

The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for

VLAN 1:

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

224.1.2.3

Eth1/11

IGMP

Console#

IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)

Command

Function

Mode Pag

ip igmp snooping querier

Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC

4-162

ip igmp snooping

query-count

Configures the query count

Configures the query interval

Configures the report delay

Configures the query timeout

ip igmp snooping

query-interval

4-163

4-164

ip igmp snooping

query-max-response-time

ip igmp snooping

router-port-expire-time

4-161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

ip igmp snooping querier

This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping querier

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is

responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.

Example

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping query-count

This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-count count

no ip igmp snooping query-count

count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been

no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the

multicast group. (Range: 2-10)

Default Setting

2 times

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a

multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries

defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer

is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query-max-

response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not

responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.

4-162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering Commands

Example

The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-163)

ip igmp snooping query-interval

This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds

no ip igmp snooping query-interval

seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query

messages. (Range: 60-125)

Default Setting

125 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time

This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the

default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds

no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time

seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-30)

Default Setting

10 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Command Usage

• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.

• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is

expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries

defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not responded,

a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command. If the

countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded, then that client is

considered to have left the multicast group.

Example

The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping version (4-159)

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-163)

ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time

This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds

no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time

seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before

it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving

query packets) to have expired.

(Range: 300-500)

Default Setting

300 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.

Example

The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300

Console(config)#

4-164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multicast Filtering Commands

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping version (4-159)

Static Multicast Routing Commands

Command

Function

Adds a multicast router port

Shows multicast router ports

Mode Pag

ip igmp snooping vlan

mrouter

show ip igmp snooping

mrouter

4-166

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to

remove the configuration.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface

•

vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

• port-channel channel-id (Value: 1)

Default Setting

No static multicast router ports are configured.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be

able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known

multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or

trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the

current multicast groups.

Example

The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11

Console(config)#

4-165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned

multicast router ports.

Syntax

show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]

vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic.

Example

The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type

---- ------------------- -------

Eth 1/11 Static

Eth 1/12 Dynamic

Console#

IP Interface Commands

There are no IP addresses assigned to this switch by default. You must manually

configure a new address to manage the switch over your network or to connect the

switch to existing IP subnets. You may also need to a establish a default gateway

between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another

network segment.

Basic IP Configuration

Command

Function

Mod Pag

ip address

Sets the IP address for the current interface

4-167

ip default-gateway

Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC

other subnetworks

show ip interface

show ip redirects

ping

Displays the IP settings for this device

ip dhcp restart client (4-83)

4-169

Displays the default gateway configured for this device

Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the

network

NE,

4-166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IP Interface Commands

ip address

This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use

the no form to restore the default IP address.

Syntax

ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}

no ip address

•

ip-address - IP address

netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies

the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.

bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.

•

dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.

Default Setting

IP address: 0.0.0.0

Netmask: 255.0.0.0

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (VLAN)

Command Usage

• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over

the network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets. You can manually

configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address from a

BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,

separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the

configuration program.

• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until a

BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast

periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and

DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).

• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp

restart client command, or by rebooting the switch.

Note: Before you can change the IP address, you must first clear the current address

with the no form of this command.

Example

In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

4-167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

ip default-gateway

This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist

on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the static route.

Syntax

ip default-gateway gateway

no ip default-gateway

gateway - IP address of the default gateway

Default Setting

No static route is established.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different

IP segment.

Example

The following example defines a default gateway for this device:

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show ip redirects (4-169)

show ip interface

This command displays the settings of an IP interface.

Default Setting

All interfaces

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: User specified.

Console#

Related Commands

show ip redirects (4-169)

4-168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IP Interface Commands

show ip redirects

This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip redirects

ip default gateway 10.1.0.254

Console#

Related Commands

ip default-gateway (4-168)

ping

This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.

Syntax

ping host [count count][size size]

•

host - IP address or IP alias of the host.

count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)

size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)

The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified

because the switch adds header information.

Default Setting

This command has no default for the host.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.

• Following are some results of the ping command:

• Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,

depending on network traffic.

• Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears

in ten seconds.

• Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that the

destination is unreachable.

• Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry in the

route table.

• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.

4-169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Line Interface

Example

Console#ping 10.1.0.9

Type ESC to abort.

PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds

response time: 10 ms

response time: 0 ms

Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:

5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)

Approximate round trip times:

Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 10 ms, Average = 8 ms

Console#

Related Commands

interface (4-84)

4-170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A: Software Specifications

Software Features

Authentication

Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1x), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security

DHCP Client

Port Configuration

1000BASE-T: 10/100/1000 Mbps, half/full duplex

1000BASE-SX/LX: 1000 Mbps, full duplex

Flow Control

Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3x

Half Duplex: Back pressure

Broadcast Storm Control

Traffic throttled above a critical threshold

Port Mirroring

Multiple source ports, one destination port

Rate Limits

Input Limit

Output limit

Range (configured per port)

Port Trunking

Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)

Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)

Spanning Tree Protocol

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)

VLAN Support

Up to 255 groups; port-based, protocol-based, or tagged (802.1Q),

Class of Service

Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing

(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),

Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Precedence, IP DSCP

Multicast Filtering

IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)

Additional Features

BOOTP client

CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing)

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)

SMTP Email Alerts

A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Software Specifications

Management Features

In-Band Management

Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell

Out-of-Band Management

RS-232 DB-9 console port

Software Loading

TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band

SNMP

Management access via MIB database

Trap management to specified hosts

RMON

Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)

Standards

ANSI Plan 998

Draft IETF ADSL MIB VDSL 10

IEEE 802.3 Ethernet,

IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet

IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex flow control (ISO/IEC 8802-3)

IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet,

IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T

IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

IEEE 802.1v Protocol-based VLANs

IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol

IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities

IEEE 802.1p Priority tags

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication

ARP (RFC 826)

DHCP (RFC 1541)

HTTPS

ICMP (RFC 792)

IGMP (RFC 1112)

IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)

RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)

RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)

SNTP (RFC 2030)

SNMP (RFC 1157)

SNMPv2 (RFC 1907)

SSH (Version 1.5)

A-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Management Information Bases

Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)

Entity MIB (RFC 2737)

Ethernet MIB (RFC 2665)

Ether-like MIB (RFC 1643)

Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)

Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)

Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)

IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)

Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)

Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)

IP Multicasting related MIBs

MAU MIB (RFC 2668)

MIB II (RFC 1213)

Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1x)

Private MIB

Quality of Service MIB

RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2618)

RMON MIB (RFC 2819)

RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)

TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB

TCP MIB (RFC 2013)

Trap (RFC 1215)

UDP MIB (RFC 2012)

A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Software Specifications

A-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Chart

Symptom

Action

CannotconnectusingTelnet,

Web browser, or SNMP

software

•

Be sure you have configured the agent with a valid IP address, subnet

mask and default gateway.

If you are trying to connect to the agent via the IP address for a tagged

VLAN group, your management station must include the appropriate tag

in its transmitted frames.

•

Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the

port you are using has not been disabled.

•

Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.

If you cannot connect using Telnet or SSH, you may have exceeded the

maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try

connecting again at a later time.

Cannot access the on-board

configuration program via a

serial port connection

•

Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,

8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and the baud rate set to any of the

following (9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps).

•

Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out

connections provided in the Installation Guide.

Forgot or lost the password

Contact your local distributor.

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

B-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Boot Protocol (BOOTP)

BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP

address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices

system files, and the name of the boot file.

Class of Service (CoS)

CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and

then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the

queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent

blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the

packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or

DSCP priority bit.

Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)

Terminating equipment, such as terminals, phones, and routers, supplied by the

phone company, installed at customer sites, and connected to the phone company

network.

Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)

DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based

on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of

forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then

into the output queues.

Domain Name Service (DNS)

A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.

Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)

Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP

network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability

of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration

options.

Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)

EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network

access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and

password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server

(e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1x

Port Authentication standard.

Glossary-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)

Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register

necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined

in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and

propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so

that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN

containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration

Protocol.

Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)

GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP

requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE

802.1p standard.

Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.

IEEE 802.1D

Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the

Spanning Tree Protocol.

IEEE 802.1Q

VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It

allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a

standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.

IEEE 802.1p

An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The

standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches

to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.

IEEE 802.1s

An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) which provides

independent spanning trees for VLAN groups.

IEEE 802.1x

Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first

enter a user ID and password for authentication.

IEEE 802.3ac

Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.

Glossary-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

IEEE 802.3x

Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on

full-duplex links.

IGMP Snooping

Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast

Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.

IGMP Query

On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the

device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to

which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP

address in the subnetwork.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast

services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork,

one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping

track of group membership.

In-Band Management

Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.

IP Multicast Filtering

A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.

IP Precedence

The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits

defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control

packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The eight values are mapped one-to-one

to the Class of Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to

suit the requirements for specific network applications.

Layer 2

Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related

directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on

MAC addresses.

Link Aggregation

See Port Trunk.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on

another device.

Glossary-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Management Information Base (MIB)

An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that

contains information about a specific device.

Multicast Switching

A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for

which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within

the designated multicast VLAN group.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time

servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize

local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.

Out-of-Band Management

Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.

Port Authentication

See IEEE 802.1x.

Private Branch Exchange (PBX)

A telephone exchange local to a particular organisation who use, rather than

provide, telephone services.

POTS

Plain Old Telephone Service.

Port Mirroring

A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for

troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target

port to be studied unobstructively.

Port Trunk

Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to

create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical

links.

Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the

assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,

uplink ports.

Glossary-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)

RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central

server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.

Remote Monitoring (RMON)

RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the

polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic

conditions, including specific error types.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of

that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can

authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between

management clients and the switch.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)

A standard host-to-host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP, port 25.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network

management services.

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a

Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP

server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in

complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs

data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of

the network.

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)

TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central

server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.

Telnet

Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over

TCP/IP.

Glossary-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the

network layer protocol.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)

A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.

User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as

the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP

packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be

discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too

complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.

VDSL

Very high data rate Digital Subscriber Line: A family of digital telecommunications

protocols designed to allow high-speed data communication at data rates from

below 1 Mbps to 52.8 Mbps with the corresponding maximum reach ranging from

4500 feet to 1000 feet of 24-gauge twisted-pair cable over the existing copper

telephone lines between end-users and telephone companies.

Virtual LAN (VLAN)

A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain

regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN

serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share

information and resources as though located on the same LAN.

XModem

A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte

blocks and error-corrected.

Glossary-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Numerics

802.1x, port authentication 3-33, 4-68

See DHCP

edge port, STA 3-83, 3-85, 4-132

event logging 4-35

acceptable frame type 3-94, 4-140

address table 3-73, 4-122

aging time 3-75, 4-125

firmware

displaying version 3-9, 4-54

upgrading 3-15, 4-55

BOOTP 3-13, 4-167

BPDU 3-76

broadcast storm, threshold 3-48, 4-89

gateway, default 3-12, 4-168

Class of Service See CoS

CLI, showing commands 4-4

command line interface See CLI

community string 2-6, 3-21, 4-76

configuration settings, saving or

restoring 2-7, 3-16, 4-55

console port, required connections 2-2

CoS

hardware version, displaying 3-9, 4-54

HTTPS 3-28, 4-29

HTTPS, secure server 3-28, 4-29

IEEE 802.1D 3-76, 4-126

IEEE 802.1w 3-76, 4-126

IEEE 802.1x 3-33, 4-68

IGMP

configuring 3-98, 4-147

DSCP 3-105, 4-153

groups, displaying 3-113, 4-161

Layer 2 3-109, 4-158

query 3-109, 4-162

query, Layer 2 3-110, 4-161

snooping 3-109, 4-158

snooping, configuring 3-110, 4-158

ingress filtering 3-95, 4-141

IP address

BOOTP/DHCP 3-13 , 4-83 , 4-167

setting 2-4, 3-11, 4-167

IP precedence

enabling 3-103, 4-152

mapping priorities 3-104, 4-153

IP precedence 3-104, 4-152

layer 3/4 priorities 3-103, 4-152

queue mapping 3-100, 4-150

queue mode 3-101, 4-148

traffic class weights 3-102, 4-149

default gateway, configuration 3-12,

default priority, ingress port 3-98,

default settings, system 1-5

DHCP 3-13 , 4-167

client 3-12, 4-82

dynamic configuration 2-5

Differentiated Code Point Service See

DSCP

link type, STA 3-83, 3-85, 4-134

logging

syslog traps 4-38

to syslog servers 4-37

log-in, Web interface 3-2

downloading software 3-15, 4-55

DSCP

enabling 3-103, 4-153

mapping priorities 3-105, 4-154

dynamic addresses, displaying 3-74,

Index-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

logon authentication 3-24, 4-60

RADIUS client 4-61

priority, default port ingress 3-98,

problems, troubleshooting C-1

protocol migration 3-86, 4-135

RADIUS server 4-61

TACACS+ client 3-25, 4-64

TACACS+ server 3-25, 4-64

logon authentication, sequence 3-26,

4-60

queue weights 3-102, 4-149

RADIUS, logon authentication 4-61

rate limits, setting 3-50, 4-97

remote logging 4-38

main menu 3-3

Management Information Bases

(MIBs) A-3

mirror port, configuring 3-49, 4-95

multicast filtering 3-109, 4-158

multicast groups 3-113, 4-161

displaying 4-161

restarting the system 3-18, 4-20

RSTP 3-76, 4-126

global configuration 3-77, 4-126

secure shell 3-30, 4-31

Secure Shell configuration 3-30, 4-32,

Simple Network Management Protocol

serial port

configuring 4-9

See SNMP

SNMP 3-20

static 3-113, 4-159, 4-161

multicast services

configuring 3-114, 4-159

displaying 3-113, 4-161

multicast, static router port 3-112,

password, line 4-11

passwords 2-4

administrator setting 3-24, 4-24

path cost 3-77

method 3-80, 4-130

STA 3-77, 4-130

port authentication 3-33, 4-68

port priority

configuring 3-98, 4-147

default ingress 3-98, 4-147

STA 4-132

port security, configuring 3-31, 4-66

port, statistics 3-51, 4-92

ports

autonegotiation 3-43, 4-86

broadcast storm threshold 3-48,

capabilities 3-43, 4-87

duplex mode 3-42, 4-85

flow control 3-42, 4-88

forced selection on combo

ports 3-41

speed 3-42, 4-85

ports, configuring 3-39, 4-84

ports, mirroring 3-49, 4-95

community string 3-21, 4-76

enabling traps 3-22, 4-79

filtering IP addresses 3-23, 4-80

trap manager 3-22, 4-78

software

displaying version 3-9, 4-54

downloading 3-15, 4-55

Spanning Tree Protocol See STA

specifications, software A-1

SSH, configuring 3-30, 4-32, 4-33

STA 3-76, 4-125

edge port 3-83, 3-85, 4-132

global settings, configuring 3-79,

4-126–4-130

global settings, displaying 3-77,

interface settings 3-81,

4-131–4-135, 4-136

link type 3-83, 3-85, 4-134

path cost 3-77, 4-131

path cost method 3-80, 4-130

port priority 4-132

protocol migration 3-86, 4-135

transmission limit 3-80, 4-130

standards, IEEE A-2

Index-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

startup files

creating 3-16, 4-55

displaying 3-15, 4-49

setting 3-15, 4-59

static addresses, setting 3-73, 4-122

statistics

port 3-51, 4-92

STP 3-79, 4-126

STP Also see STA

system clock, setting 3-18, 4-44

system software, downloading from

server 3-15, 4-55

upgrading software 3-15, 4-55

user password 3-24, 4-24, 4-25

VLANs 3-86 –3-97, 4-137–??

adding static members 3-92, 3-93,

creating 3-91, 4-138

description 3-86

displaying basic information 3-88,